MAXIMA 2004 - Sedan NISSAN - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 9.0/10 📄 280 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL MAXIMA 2004 NISSAN

FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you under- stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov- ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about ma ing and servicing your ve- hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- er's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, as- sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. A WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers! + NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted EE its and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this owner's manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per- formance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered un- der NISSAN warranties. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 11/05/03—tbrooks =:

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with- out obligation

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. À CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully. APD1005 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” H you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. ES > | 2 S D Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. + » t « Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. © 2003 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. GARDENA, CALIFORNIA Al rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar- dena, California. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 11/05/03—tbrooks =:

in Smyrna, Tennessee WFW0002 Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical franspartation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc- cessful worldwide company that manufactures cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them in 170 nations. NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in Tokyo, Japan in 1983, and NISSAN affliates worid- wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other diversified products. NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in- vestment in North America. NISSAN's commitment is over $6 bilion dollars in capital investments in facilities across the continent. Some of the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing facilities in Can- ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in San Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Tech- nical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than 21,000 people throughout the United States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 people work for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North America: NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc. its suppli- ers and over 150 dealers employ approximately 4,500 people. These include company employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma- terials and services ranging from the operation of port facilities and transportation services, to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com- puters in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of syn- thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com- pan has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and — most importantly — through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that have been established by NISSAI Safety has also been buil into your NISSAN. As you know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety systems that wi help protect you and your passen- gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident We urge you to use the seat belts every time you drive the vehicle. The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re- flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman- ship — a product that we can be proud to build and you can be proud to own. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or ques- tions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers 1-808-836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: — Your name, address, and telephone number — Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side) — Date of purchase — Current odometer reading — Your NISSAN dealer's name — Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at: For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.0. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Hawaii customers Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 2880 Kilihau St. Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index

[= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

1. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P. 1-9) Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-20) Front seat belts (P. 1-23) Rear seat belts (P. 1-23) Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-89) LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-38)

10. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9)

11. Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. CRERES LII0001 0-2 Illustrated table of contents [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

LII0002 Engine hood (P. 3-10) Headlight and tu signal switch (P. 2-19) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-17) Windshield (P. 8-21) Sunroof (P. 2-36) Power windows (P. 2-34) Door locks, keyfob, keys (P. 3-3, 8-5, 3-2) Mirrors (P. 3-17) Tire pressure (P. 9-11) … Flat tire (P. 6-2) Tire chains (P. 8-39) Comering light (P. 2-19) Fog light switch (P. 2-19) Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LI10003| 0-4 Illustrated table of contents DNOWmBEON = Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18) Rear sun shade (P. 2-38) Interior trunk lid release (P. 8-12) Trunk lid (P. 3-10) Vehicle loading (P. 9-12) Tie-down/towing hook (P. 6-12) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) Fuel filer cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-13, P. 9-3) Fuel filler lid (P. 3-18)

10. Child safety locks (P. 3-5)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

2. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-39,

5. Sunroof (P. 2-36)

6. Front seat (P. 1-2)

7... Rear console (P. 2-32)

8. Rear seat (P. 1-6)

9. Rear cup holders (P. 2-29)

10. Front console (P. 2-31)

11. Front cup holders (P. 2-29)

12. Park brake, parking on hills (P. 5-12,

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WIl0O11 lllustrated table of contents 0-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

1. Headlight and turn signal switch

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-8)

4. Driver side, center and passenger side

ventilators (P. 4-14)

5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14)

7. Audio system controls (P. 4-19)

8. Climate controls (P. 4-16)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

16. Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25)

18. Outside mirror controls (P. 8-17)

19... Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)

(P. 2-38) *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual ( so equipped) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1 0-7

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) Engine oil filer cap (P. 8-8) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P.8-14) Air cleaner (P. 8-18) Battery (P. 8-15) Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23) Transmission dipstick (A/T models) (P.8-11) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8) Radiator cap (P. 8-7) .… Fuse block (P. 8-23) Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P.8-14) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7) [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz =:

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Seats .…...... . 1-2 Front menual seat adjusiment — passenger side.…......... EE Front power seat adiustment “or drivers s seat and if so equipped for passenger's seat). . Folding rear seat (f so equipped). Head restraint adjustment .……..... Active head restraint (front seats)..…. Supplemental restraint system Precautions on supplemental restraint | system . Supplemental air bag warning labels. Supplementl air bag waming gene Seat belts . Precautions on seat belt usage. … Child safety.…................. Pregnant women . Injured persons. Three-point type seat bel with retractor. Seat belt extenders ...................... Seat belt maintenance . Child restraints. . Precautions on child restraints Installation on rear seat center (5- passenger models only) or outboard positions ............ . LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHlildren) system.……........... Top tether strap child restraint Installation on front passenger seat … [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

SEATS ARS1152| A WARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this section. 1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

A WARNING e Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle. « After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LRS0244| LRS0245| Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pullthe lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped. A WARNING After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ADJUSTMENT (for driver's seat and if so equipped for passenger's seat) A WARNING e Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle. + Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in s: ous accidents. Operating tips e The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 80 seconds, then reactivate the switch. 1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags e Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)" in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- matic drive positioner operation. Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward wi slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stoppedi [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz =:

WRS0164| LRS0239 Seat lifter (driver's seat) Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. Manual Lumbar support (driver's seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down (manual) or move the switch forward or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LRS 0246| FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so equipped) Interior trunk access For models without rear center console, the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown. @ Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf. @ Fold down the passenger side seatback. A WARNING + Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat whenit is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop. e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- n, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags + When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop. e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear Seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LRS 0247] LICO431| LICO401| To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach through the opening and pull on the strap @ located behind the seat. The rear seats can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access, The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the release button. For models with rear center console, the trunk can be accessed through the access panel be- tween the rear seats. The panel can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key can- not be used to lock or unlock the access panel For more information on keys, refer to Keys” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Center armrest Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-7 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Type À — Front Type B — Rear Adjust the head restraint so the center is level HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT AWARNING with the center of your ears. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, [Head restraints should be adjusted prop- push and hold the lock knob and push the head erly as they may provide significant pro- restraint down. tection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment To adjust the head restraint forward or backward ROC Vase SNS (Type A only), push it in the direction required. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

SPA1025 ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats) A WARNING e Always adjust the head restraints prop- erly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effec- tiveness of the active head restraint. + Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Al- ways wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. e Do not attach anything to the head re- straint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occu- pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some ofthe forces that may lead to whip- lash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as de- scribed earlier in this section. SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- tion contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side- impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front pas- senger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the im- pact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-9 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly wom and the occu- pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish ers. (See “Seat belts” later in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Sit upright and well back. 7 WRS0031 A WARNING e The supplemental front air bags ordi- narily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help uce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. 1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags e The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are g well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of po: any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. u may also receive serious or fatal juries from the supplemental front bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates. ARS1133| A WARNING + Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-11 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ARS1041 ARS1042| ARS1043| 1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ARS1045) WRS0256| A WARNING e Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain side- impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. e Never install a rear-facing child re- il n the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seri- ously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” later in this section for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-13 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Do not lean against the door. SSS0101 Do not lean against the door. ssso1ssl A WARNING Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag: e The supplemental side air bag and cur- tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal im- pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se- verity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. 1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags A WARNING + The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear out- board seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0032| SSS0159) SS50162 A WARNING e When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. ured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-15 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ule SRS curtain side-impact air bag (left)

4. Satellite sensors Seat belt buckle switches

5. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Supplemental front air bag system The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows the front air bags to be de- signed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the informa cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental front air bag system is de- signed to inflate in higher severity frontal colli- sions, although it may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack ofit) is not always an indication of proper supple- mental front air bag system operation. The supplemental air bag system has dual stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used. Only one front air bag may [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This does not indicate improper perfor- mance of the system. If you have any questions about the performance of your air bag system, please contact your NISSAN dealer When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok- ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Seat belts should be correctly wo and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. The supplemental front air bags in- late quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision: The supplemental front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. A WARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer- ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- jects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- tal front air bag inflates. Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se- verely burn yourself. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result serious personal injury. Tampering cludes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. 1-17 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Work on and around the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri cal equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unautho- rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. e A cracked windshield should be re- mediately by a qualified re- ty. À cracked windshield could affect inflation of the supplemental ai bag system. + The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- ate sections in this Owner's Manual.

LI) UT CD 4 (4 LRS0259| Supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact air bags system The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo- cated in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide- lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- position occupants. However, all of the infor- mation, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side- impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate ifthe forces in another type of collision are similar 1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation. When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy. Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side- impact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain side- impact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctiy worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi- tions. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning ht will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. A WARNING Do not place any objects near the seat- back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is to prevent acci- dental inflation of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. + Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. + Work around and on the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system Should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment Should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system.

• The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you infor the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-19 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats) A WARNING e The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after a n. It must be re- placed together with the retractor and buckle as a ui e lf the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre- tensioner system checked and, if nec- essary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering belt system may result in serious per- sonal injury. + Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system. e If you need to dispose of the pre- tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental air bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac- or, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may 1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy. If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light Æ will not come on, will flash intermit- tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on afterthe ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LRS0100| 1... SRS Air Bag Waming Labels (located on the sun visors)

2. RS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-

WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag waming light, displaying in the instrument panel, moni- tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side- impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light iluminates for about 7 seconds and then tums off. This means the system is operational. H any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing: © The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. e The supplemental air bag waming light flashes intermittenty. e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. Repair and replacement procedure The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has oc- curred. Repair and replacement of these supple- mental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the ve- hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple- mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. A WARNING e Once a supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag or curtain side-impact air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag mod- ule and pre-tensioner seat belt system Should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys- tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of the supple- mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

SEAT BELTS Sit upright and well back Re SSS0136]

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE I you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position in- cludes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-23 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Sit upright and weil back. / SSS0134| SSS0016)

« Every person who drives or rides in this e The seat belt should be properly ad- vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

SSS0014 A WARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too increase the risk of internal an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. If the seat belt warning light glows con- tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pre- tensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. e All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, Should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un- less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. e All child restraints and attaching hard- ware should be inspected after any col- lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the child's size. General, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child re- straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-25 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A WARNING Infants and children need special protec- tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. AI U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child Re- straints” later in this section. In addition, there are many types of child re- straints available for larger children which should be used for maximum protection. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system” earlier in this section. Infants and small children NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil- dren be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca- nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your ve- hicle and always follow the manufacturer's in- structions for installation and use. Larger children Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. Hthe child's seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly posi- tioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a chi the cargo areas while the vehicle is movi child could be seriously injured or an accident or sudden stop. PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be wom snug, and always position the lap belt as low as pos- sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING « Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown int: and receive neck or other serious ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. WRS0174 WRS0137| Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts @ Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. 1-27 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0138| @ Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. @ Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat belt and the rear three- point seat belts have a cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When automatic locking mode is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints”" later in this section for more information. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passen- ger, the locking mode should not be acti- vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- fortable seat belt tension. A WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags WRS0139| Unfastening the seat belts @ Tounfastenthe seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- tracts. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: e_ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. © When the vehicle slows down rapidly. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows. e Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and re- strict further belt movement. Ifthe retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion, see a NISSAN dealer. LRS0391|

LRS0242 Center of rear seat Selecting correct set of seat belts The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle. Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out the adjustment button D and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position (@), so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-29 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A WARNING e After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoul- der belt anchor up and down to make sure securely fixed in position. e The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

ff, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required. A WARNING © Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the inal equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. + Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud- den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

e_ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. ef dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properiy. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- sembly should be replaced. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

RESTRAINTS A WARNING © Infants and small children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while g in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can re- sult in serious injury or death. A WARNING Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. e Never install a rear-facing child re- straint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seri- ously injure or kill your child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. + NISSAN recommends that the child re- straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. e An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system. Some child re- straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the *LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- tem” later in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-31 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes are offered by several manufactur- ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: e_ Choose onlyarestraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. e_ Checkthe childrestraintin your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system e_Ifthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures. AII US. states and provinces of Canada that infants and small children be ned in an approved child restraint at es while the vehicle is being oper- A WARNING e Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle.

Follow all of the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child re- straint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being in- jured a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The ch restraint should not move more than 1 inch. lfthe restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in an- other seat and test it again. 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags e For a front-facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the child’s face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the nt. If you must install a front restraint in the front seat, see “Installation on front passenger seat” later in this section. + When your child restraint is not in use, keel secured with a seat belt to pre- vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident. À CAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

CENTER (5-passenger models only)

OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS

A WARNING t seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. e Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint. WRS0248 WRS0249 Front Facing (outboard) — step 1 Front facing When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps:

Position the child restraint on the seat. lt can be placed in a front facing direction, de- pending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instruc- tions. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Front Facing (center for 5-passenger mod- els only) — step 1 1-33 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0250 WRS0251 WRS0146 Front Facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing, Front Facing — step 3

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat bel retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Front Facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat bel to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0252 Front Facing — step 5

5. Before placingthe child in the child restraint,

use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that itis securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Checkto make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0261 Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1 Rear facing When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps:

Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manu- facturer's instructions. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-35 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0262 WRS0150 WRS0260 Rear Facing (center for 5-passenger mod- els only) — step 1 Rear Facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer’ instructions for belt routing. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Rear Facing — step 3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). lt reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0253 Rear Facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. Rear Facing — step 5

5. Before placing the child inthe child restraint,

use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that itis securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-37 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0172| LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM A WARNING e Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident. e Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH system anchors. The child re- straint will not be secured properly. e The LATCH system anchors are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- nected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child re- straints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys- tem. This information may also be in the child restraint owner's manual. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation in- structions. When installing à child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps: A WARNING Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system an- chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH sys- tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatible

child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the seat. If the child re- straint is equipped with a top tether, see “Top tether strap child restraint" later in this section for installation instructions. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

2. After attaching the child restraint and before

placing the child in it, use force to til the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. LRS0243 5-passenger models

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT A WARNING e Child restraint anchor points are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. 4-passenger models + After removing a rear seat head re- straint for top tether installation, store securely to prevent it from causing injury to passengers or damage to the le in case of sudden braking or an properly when top tether use. no longer in Hyour child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point provided behind its position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-39 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable. Remove the head restraint from the seat back. Store it in a secure place. Flip up the anchor cover for the anchor point which is located di- rectly behind the child seat. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seat back (D and secure it to the tether anchor bracket that pro- vides the straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's in- structions to remove any slack. For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint installation instructions in this section and the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Anchor point locations Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher. 1f you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. WRS0256|

PASSENGER SEAT A WARNING e Never install a rear-facing child re- straint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate wi great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seri- ously injure or kill your child. 1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ° NISSAN recommends that child re- straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward- facing child restraint in the front pas- senger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. A child restraint with a top tether strap Should not be used in the front passen- ger seat. The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Move seat fully back WRS0379 WRS0159 Front Facing — step 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-

senger seat. It should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's in- structions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direc- tion and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Front Facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-41 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WRS0160 WRS0161 WRS0380 Front Facing — step 3

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all ofthe belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). lt reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. Front Facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the bel. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags Front Facing — step 5 Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that itis securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-43 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

1. Headlight and turn signal switch

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-8)

4. Lefthand, center and righthand ventila-

5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14)

7. Audio system controls (P. 4-19)

8. Climate controls (P. 4-16)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

16. Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25)

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) or Traction con- trol system (TCS) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-26, P. 2-26) Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-24) Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38) *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual (if so equipped) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and klometers per hour (km/h). Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position: 2-4 Instruments and controls The odometer records the total distance the ve- hicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Changing the display: Pushing the change button changes the display as follows: TipLAT = Tip 8] — mil A] Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- ond resets the trip odometer to zero. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO384| TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- lutions per minute (r/min). Do not rev engine into the red zone ®). ACAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range (D when the gauge needle points Within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. À CAUTION fthe gauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued opera- tion of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle over- heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec- tion for immediate action required. Instruments and controls 2-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO385| FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is tumed to OFF. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty). 2-6 Instruments and controls The 4 indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the driver's side of the vehicle. À CAUTION ef the vehicle runs out of fuel, the NE malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the ARR lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. e For additional information, see “Mal- function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in this section. COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped) LICO422 When the COMPASS switch is in the ON posi- tion, the compass display @ will indicate the direction the vehicle is heading. N: north E: east S: south W: west Hthe display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete ciroles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will ap pear in the display.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration. Record the zone number

8. Press the COMPASS switch until the new

zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display tumed on, push the COM-

PASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be dis- played in the mirror compass window).

2. Toggle until correct zone is found and re-

lease switch Instruments and controls 2-7 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

8. The display will show all segments, and re-

turn to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity.

4. Hthe vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1

through 3. See map. e_lfthe compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. The compass may not indicate the correct compas point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.) ACAUTION e Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. 2-8 Instruments and controls [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti-lock brake warning light

Charge warning light Brake waming light Door open warning light Engine oil pressure waming light Low fuel warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light AT Automatic transmission check warning light (if Seat belt waming light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light (AIT models only) CRUISE main switch indicator light Cruise SET switch indicator light High beam indicator light (Blue) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) SLIP | Sip indicator light (if so equipped) Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) a D) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights VDC | Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped) CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and tum the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: É ,erake or (D) , 7 , SF If equipped, the following lights come on briefly and then go off: ABS or ©, #7, Ga. SLIP, Ex, If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly. WARNING LIGHTS ABS © © Anti-lock brake warning light Hthe light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Instruments and controls 2-9 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz =:

Turn off the engine, and start it again by slowly turning the ignition key (quickly do- ing so may cause the ABS light to stay on when there is nothing wrong). If the light stays on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti- lock function ceases, but the regular braking system continues to operate. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair. AT | Automatic transmission check CHECK! warning light (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is tumed ON, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light blinks for approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the transmission.

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. BRAKE| OT Brake warning light When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied, and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with 2-10 Instruments and controls the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" sec- tion of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer A WARNING © Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv- ing it could be dangerous. e Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. e If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. Charge warning light this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. ACAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON position.

Door open warning light Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flckers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil" in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual. ACAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se- rious damage to the engine almost imme- diately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). This light comes on when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid as necessary. See the “Maintenance and do-it- yourself” section of this manual. Low fuel warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light [A Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is tumed to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 7 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened. Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags” section for pre- cautions on seat belt usage. Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. I any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: e_ The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. e The supplemental air bag waming light flashes intermittenty. e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tensioner seat belts may not function properly. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system" in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags” section of this manual. A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. Led This light comes on when the trunk lid is not securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON position. Trunk lid open warning light Instruments and controls 2-11 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

INDICATOR LIGHTS D Automatic transmission posi- tion indicator light (A/T models only) When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, the indicator in the speedometer shows the automatic transmission selector lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual Cruise main switch indicator light The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. SET CRUISE Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop- erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 2-12 Instruments and controls O High beam indicator light (Blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. SERVICE ENGINE SOON Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) I this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steadÿ ifthe fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filer cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the #Æ lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. Operation The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways: © Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filer cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The # lamp should turn off after a few driving trips. If the SF lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. © Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re- duce or avoid emission control system dam- age: — do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h) — avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. — avoid steep uphil grades. — if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer, You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz =:

À CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav- ing the emi n control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con- trol system. Slip indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. SLIP The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or go off, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The system operates in all transmission shift lever positions, but the system can upshift the trans- mission only as high as the indicated shift lever position. æs | Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi- cates the traction control system is not operating. Push the traction control off switch again or re- start the engine and the system will operate nor- mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The traction control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will tu off after about 2 secondés if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- tor light while you are driving, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. While the traction control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system Working when starting the vehicle or accelerat- ing, but this is normal er) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. VDC | Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating. Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. While the vehicle dynamic control system is op- erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or ac- celerating, but this is normal. Instruments and controls 2-13 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The front disc brake pads have audible wear wamings. When a front brake pad requires re- placement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warn- ing sound is heard. Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver's door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. Light reminder chime With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- ing the vehicle. 2-14 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS () 1 SECURITY LICO387 Your vehicle has two types of security systems: e_ Vehicle security system + NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System—NVIS

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed. Security indicator light (Vehicle secu- rity system) The security indicator light @ is located on the instrument panel near the windshield The security indicator light shows the status of the vehicle security system. The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position. The vehicle security system has four phases. For each phase the operation of the security indicator light is different. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Security indicator light operation Phase Security indicator light output Disarmed Blinks every

|+—Pre-armed Steady light for 30 seconds |«—Armed Blinks every

Alarm activated/ Disarming alarm Nolight LIco053 How to arm the vehicle security sys- tem

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch

8. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the key, power door lock switch or with the keyfob. Keyfob operation: e Pushthe {f] button on the keyfob. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked Whenthe _{f} buttonis pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked The hom may or may not beep. Refer to “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles with- out navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light

comes on. The SECURITY light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys- tem is now pre-armed. After about 80 sec- onds the vehicle security system automati- cally shifts into the armed phase. The SECURITY light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not arm. e_Ifthe key is turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm. Fur- thermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is re- moved. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. e Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF pos . Instruments and controls 2-15 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm © The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. © The alarm automatically turns off after ap- proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or keyfob (even if the door is un- locked by releasing the door inside lock switch) or opening the trunk lid by operating the opener lever. How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the (button on the key- fob. 2-16 Instruments and controls

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered NVIS key. Ifthe engine fails to start using a registered NVIS key (for example, when interference is caused by another NVIS key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following proce- dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Tum the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 5 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered NVIS key. Hthe no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered NVIS key on a Separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-

SECURITY LICO387| Security indicator light (NISSAN Ve- hicle Immobilizer System) The security indicator light ®) is located on the instrument panel near the windshield. The security indicator light blinks every 3 sec- onds whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi- cates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) is operational Hthe NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the en- gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NVIS service as soon as possible. Please b all NVIS keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH LICO386) SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed: @ intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward @ (Slower) or (8) (Faster). Also, the intermit- tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) Instruments and controls 2-17 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

NOTE: You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion. Refer to “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles without navigation sys- tem) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis- play screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section later in this manual. @ Low — continuous low speed operation @ High — continuous high speed operation Push the lever up @ to have one sweep opera- tion of the wiper. Pull the lever toward you (6) to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. A WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds. 2-18 Instruments and controls e Do not operate the washer if the reser- voir tank is empty. + Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser- voir tank. + Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH ° ty LICO388 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. ACAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

NOTE: The top few rows of wires on the rear wii dow are not part of the rear window de- froster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped) A WARNING ANHIGH VOLTAGE e When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xe- non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. + Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head- lights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncom- ing driver or the dri ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize. e The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off opera- tion. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon head- lights is not reduced. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drasti- cally decrease, the light will start blink- ing, or the color of the light will be- come reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer. Instruments and controls 2-19 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Lighting @ When turning the switch to the 1 posi- tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on. @ When turning the switch tothe #2 posi- tion, the headlights come on and allthe other lights remain on 2-20 Instruments and controls Autolight system The autolight sensor (D is located on the instru- ment panel. The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: © Tum on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark. © Turn off all the lights when it is light. e_ Keep allthe lights on for up to 180 seconds after you tu the key to OFF and all doors are closed. NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad- justed. See “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles without navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section later in this manual. To turn on the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

2. Turn the ignition key to ON

8. The autolight system automatically tuns the

headlights on and off. Initial}, if the ignition switch is tumed OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset. To tu the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF,2DŒE ,or #© position. Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top driver side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight:; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

itis dark out and the headlights wil nate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become dis- Charged. LICO390) Headlight beam select @ To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on andthe 2 light illuminates. @ Pull the lever back to select the low beam. © Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system I the ignition switch is tumed OFF while the headlight switch is in the2Dd£ or #2 posi- tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes. À CAUTION e Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the ve- hicle for extended periods of time, oth- erwise the battery will go dead. + Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only) The daytime running lights automatically illumi- nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights oper- ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position orinthe=Dd£ position. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or #2 position for headlight illu- mination when driving at night. Hthe parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is tumed off. Instruments and controls 2-21 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your hts. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. 2-22 Instruments and controls LICO392 LICO391| INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni- tion switch is in ON position. The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO, 5DŒË or ED position: Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ment panel lights when driving at night. The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brighness when the headlights or parking lights are off

Turn signal @ Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. Lane change signal @ Tosignal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the #2 position, then turn the fog light switch to the #Ù position. To turn them off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate. CORNERING LIGHT The cornering light provides additional illumina- tion toward the turning direction. The cornering light will iluminate on the turning direction side when a turn is signaled with the headlights on: Push the switch on to warm other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi- tions. AI turn signal lights flash. A WARNING e If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. e Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Instruments and controls 2-23 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on. The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. 2-24 Instruments and controls HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped) LICO395)

LICO136) To sound the hom, push the center pad area of the steering wheel. A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo- cated on the center consoles.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the switch will iluminate. The heater is controlled by à thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off ACAUTION + Do notuse the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. e Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. e When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- lar materials. e If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped) LICO421| The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68°F (20°C). Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. Ifthe surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C), then tu off automatically. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually. The indicator light will go off. Instruments and controls 2-25 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. 2-26 Instruments and controls TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) TCS OFF LICO451| VDC OFF WICO534] The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con- trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. I maxi- mum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the TOS off. To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch The GE _indicator will come on. Push the “TCS OFF" switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driving” section. The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- ing conditions. the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even ifthe accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, tum the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The (BP _indicator will come on. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

“Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section. POWER OUTLET

LICO396 (Om SG0 LICO398 Passenger compartment The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 Volts 120 Watts maximum. You can route a power cord through the opening @ on the passenger compartment access panel A CAUTION e The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. e This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Front center console — Type A e Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. e Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) e Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. Instruments and controls 2-27 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

F Cn LICO397 LICO016) Front center console — Type B e Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. e Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. + When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet. 2-28 Instruments and controls Rear center console (if so equipped) SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver and passenger seats. The pockets can be used to store maps. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO399| SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. A WARNING The sunglasses case should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. À CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct Sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. LICO400 Front CUP HOLDERS To open the front cup holders, push the cup holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place. The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean- ing. The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center console. Instruments and controls 2-29 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO423 LICO402 To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down armrest, lift the cup holder id. To close, lower the lid. 2-30 Rear fold-down armrest Instruments and controls Rear center console To open the cup holders on the rear center con- sole, push the button. The cup holder lid will open. To close, gently push the lid toward the center. A WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. À CAUTION + Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent Spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. e Use only soft cups the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO403| GLOVE BOX Open the glove boxby pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking @ or unlocking @ the glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove box. A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. CONSOLE BOX A WARNING The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. À CAUTION e This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. + Do not use accessories that exceed 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one elec- trical accessory. LICO404| Armrest Push the button to elevate the armrest. To return armrest to regular position, hold the button in and push the armrest rearward until locked Instruments and controls 2-31 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO40S| LICO426) WICO697| Console box storage Pull up on the lever to open the console box. Remove the inside tray to store a large object. The console box may be used for storage of cellular phones. Open the access hole cover @) to route a cord to the power outlet. 2-32 Instruments and controls REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if so equipped) Pull up on the lever to open the console box. Some rear center consoles are equipped with a light inside the console box. The light may be turned on (D) and off (2) with the switch. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

CARGO NETS A WARNING

The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keep «+ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or packages in the cargo area from moving around straps to help prevent it from slidi gor while the vehicle is in motion. Shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, To install a cargo net, attach the hooks to the unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. retainers. + Be sure to secure all four hooks into the To remove a cargo net, detach the hooks from the retainers..The’cargo!restrainedInîthe retainers. net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured. Instruments and controls 2-33 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS A WARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while n motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate hes or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious accidents. 2-34 Instruments and controls

Door lock/unlock button Window lock button Front passenger side Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch Driver's side power window switch LICO407 DHBWN = The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. H the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the windows is canceled. To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch NOTE: The default for retained power is 45 sec- onds. The retained power can be disabled or adjusted to 2 minutes. See your NISSAN dealer to have the retained power adjusted. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO410) Front passenger power window switch The passenger window switch operates only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down ®. To close the window, pull the switch up @). Rear power window switch The rear passenger window switches open or close only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down ®. To close the window, pull the switch up Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only driver's side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window auto- matically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pullthe switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. Auto-reverse function The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation: Instruments and controls 2-35 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse fun be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc- curs. A WARNING There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. Ithe control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately low- ered. 2-36 Instruments and controls SKYVIEW"" ROOPF (if so equipped) SUNROOF (if so equipped)

LICO411| LICO412 Open or close the skyview roof shade by sliding it from side to side. Type A AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is tumed to the ACC or OFF position. Hthe driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the sunroof is canceled. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WICO698 Type B Sliding the sunroof To open the roof, slide the switchtothe € © or OPEN position (D). When the roof is tilted up, it will automatically tilt down and then open. To close the roof, slide the switchtothe ÉD or CLOSE position (2) The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen by the position of the sliding switch To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the open or closed position. Tilting the sunroof To tit the sunroof up, push the tit switch to the € or UP position (@). When the roof is open, it will automatically close and then tilt up. To tit the sunroof down, push the tit switch to the SD or DOWN position (®). Restarting the sunroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following reset procedure to return sunroof operation to normal.

1. the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting

switch repeatedly toward © or DOWN to fully close the lid.

2. Finally, push and hold the tilting switch for

more than 2 seconds toward € D or DOWN to reestablish the lid's home posi- tion. The sunroof should now operate normally. Auto reverse function (when closing or titing down the sunroof) The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving ons, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof oc- curs. A WARNING There are some small distances imme ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., the vehicle before closing the sunroof. When closing: Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. When tilting down: Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi- ately tit up. H the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- peats opening or tiking up the sunroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds Instruments and controls 2-37 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof. A WARNING © In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing. A CAUTION + Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. e Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area. Sun shade Open and close the sun shade by sliding it for- ward or backward If the sunroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof. 2-38 Instruments and controls REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped) À CAUTION e To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port. Do not allow children near the rear sun Shade system. They could be injured. Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it. Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

LICO418 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Arm rail Screen Caution label Sun shade arms The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. SON The rear sun shade switches are located on the front and rear center consoles. To raise the screen, push the upper side of the switch. To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch. The switch need not be held down. ACAUTION e Do not place objects (such as newspa- pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extend- ing or retracting, causing improper op- eration or damage to the screen. e Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result. e Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen. e Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result. INTERIOR LIGHT LICO413 Without sunroof The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardes of ignition switch position. e When the switch is in the ON position (D, the interior light illuminates, regardless of door position. The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. Instruments and controls 2-39 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LICO414 With sunroof e When the switch is in the center DOOR position (2), the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following con- ditions: — Driver's door is unlocked Lights remain on for a maximum of 80 seconds. — Driver's door is opened Lights remain on for a maximum of 80 seconds after drivers door is closed. — Ignition key is removed from key cylinder. Lights remain on for a maximum of 80 seconds. 2-40 Instruments and controls The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position, or the drivers door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after 80 minutes when doors are open. © When the switch is in the OFF position (@), the interior light does not illuminate, regard- less of door position. NOTE: The foot well and door step lights illumi- nate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after 30 utes while doors are open to prevent the battery from be- coming discharged. A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. PERSONAL LIGHTS LICO416 Models without sunroof FRONT To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again. ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

- DEO = t Li LICO415 LICO417 Models with sunroof Console light The console light @ will turn on whenever the headlights are illuminated. To turn the console light off while the headlights are illuminated, push the interior light switch to the OFF position. REAR To turn on both personal reading lights, press the switchtothe 2% position (®). To turn the lights off, return the switch to the center position. To turn on a single personal reading light, press the switch to the 2 position à. To tum a single personal reading light off, return the switch to the center position TRUNK LIGHT The light iluminates when the trunk id is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off. For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Bulb replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it- yourself” section of this manual Instruments and controls 2-41 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and se- curity systems. els powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cle's battery is discharged or is discon- nected, HomeLink® will retain all program- ming Once the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- itter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For addi- tional information refer to “Programming HomeLink®” later in this section. 2-42 Instruments and controls A WARNING e Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). À ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features creases the risk of serious injury or death. e During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. © Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transcei LICO419) PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

To begin, press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light @ blinks slowly (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-8 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter but- ton. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed . Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink® flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro- grammed device, press and hold the pro- grammed HomeLink® button — releasing when the device begins to activate. . lfthe indicator light on the HomeLink® blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink® to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per- son for convenience. . Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- gram button located on the garage door opener's motor to activate the “training mode". This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button. NOTE: Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open- er's motor and the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for conve- nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-

ing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmiy press and release the HomeLink® button you've just programmed. Press and release the HomeLink® button up to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink® button should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining HomeLink® buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.) NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed HomeLink® buttons. I you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, please refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1- 800-647-7261). Instruments and controls 2-43 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink®, continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro- gramming HomeLink®") while you press and re- press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc. it is advised to unplug the device dur- ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- sible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro- grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- propriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. 2-44 Instruments and controls PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- DIAGNOSIS Hthe HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand- held transmitter information: © replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. © position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface. © press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ruption. © position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position — keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manu- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This de- vice must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This transmitter has been tested and com- plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the device.

Instruments and controls 2-45 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

MEMO 2-46 Instruments and controls

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-

2. Valet key (red) with transponder chip

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. lf you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate: A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate 8-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilzer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for al the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the glove box lock or rear seatback lock. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilier System keys. Your dealer can dupli- cate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration pro- cess, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. Do not allow the immobilier system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with salt water. This could affect system function. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

DOORS A WARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and help keep out intruders. e Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. + Donot leave children unattended inside the vehi They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

3 © TT / Drivers side

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time. LPDO181 Turning the key toward the front (D of the vehicle locks all doors. Turning the key one time toward the rear (2 ofthe vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral ® (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows The drivers door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto- matic operation at the same time. © To open the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked. e_ To close the windows, turn the driver's door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position (1), then close the door. To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position (2) 8-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the lock position @). When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side) to the unlock position (2). Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the lock position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

H is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer. The keyfob will not function when: e_ the battery is discharged e the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m) The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. À CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the keyfob: + Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. e Do not drop the keyfob. e Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. e Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures ‘exceed 140°F (60°C). If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- ommends erasing the ID code of that key- fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing proce- dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch

8. Close the hood, trunk lid and all doors.

. Pushthe {f} button on the keyfob. All the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the hom beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. e Whenthe {f} buttonis pushed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked. e_lfa dooris open and you pushthe {f| button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Person- alized settings menu” (vehicles without naviga- tion system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- hicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys- tems" section later in this manual. WPD0133| Unlocking doors Pushthe {button on the keyfob once. Only the drivers door unlocks. e_ The hazardindicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. © The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 80 seconds when the interior light switch is in the center DOOR position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Pushthe button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds. © All doors unlock. e_ The hazardindicatorflashes once if all doors are completely closed. The interior lights can be turned off without wait- ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning to the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position. Auto relock Whenthe {À button on the keyfob is pushed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per- formed: e_ Any door is opened e _Akeyis inserted into the ignition switch and the key is turned from OFF to ON. Opening windows The keyfob allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta- neously. To open the windows, pressthe (À but- ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec- onds after all doors are unlocked. The door windows will open while pressing the button on the keyfob. This opening windows function of the keyfob can be suspended using a CONSULT-II diagnostic tool. Please contact a NISSAN dealer. The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob. Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting. See “Automatic driver positioner" later in this section. WPD0134| Releasing the trunk lid Push the button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The trunk release button on the keyfob will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The trunk lid opens. The trunk lid will open when using the key- fob even if the trunk lid release cancel switch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid” later in this section for cancel switch infor- mation. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Using the interior light The interior light can be turned off without waiting 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light button to OFF. WPDO135| Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the Æ1 button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds. The panic alarm stops when: e_ithas run for 25 seconds, or «any button is pushed on the keyfob. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WPD0136| BATTERY REPLACEMENT Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: @ Open the lid using a coin: @ Remove the battery. © Install a new battery with the “+" facing down. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent. @ Close the lid securely.

5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCK

button two or three times to check the key- fob operation: If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. e The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

HOOD TRUNK LID LPDO184| LPDO185 @ Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. @ Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood. When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments A WARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke comi the engine compartment, to avoi do not open the hood. Driver’s side OPENER OPERATION A WARNING e Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex- haust gas’ the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. The trunk lid opener lever is located below the armrest of the drivers door trim panel. To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever out. To close the trunk id, lower and push the trunk lid down securely. OFF

LPDO186| LPDO200 Cancel switch When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with the keyfob. Pre-driving checks and adjustments Rear seat without center console

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down the rear seat or trunk compartment access lid (for models with rear console), and pull the rear seat trunk release handle @). To close, push the trunk lid down securely. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LPDO201 LPDO187| Rear seat with center console 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

A WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi- nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compart- ment on the interior of the trunk lid. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LPDO188| LPDO189| OPENER OPERATION The fuel filler lid release is located on the driver's door. To open the fuel filer lid, push the release. To lock, close the fuel filer lid securely.

The fuel filler cap is à ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder D while refueling A WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- ns. You could be burned or seriously jured if it is misused or mishandied. Always stop the engine and do not Smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel Spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

e Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: — Always place the container on the ground when filling. — Do not use electronic devices when filling. — Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill- ingit. — Use only approved portable fuel con- tainers for flammable liquid. A CAUTION e If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments e Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the AÈKE mal- function indicator lamp mi to illumi- nate. Ifthe QE lampilluminates be- cause the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The QE lamp should turn off after a SOON few driving trips. If the QE lamp does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. e For additional information, see the “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section earlier in this manual.

WPDO235| AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped) Tilt operation Push the switch ® to adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position. A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Entry/Exit function The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically on models equipped with automatic transmission. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. Telescopic operation Push the switch (© to adjust the steering wheel forward or backward @) to the desired position A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv- er's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of po: n in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up ist it when it inflates. Always sit back ist the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. WPD0234| MANUAL OPERATION Tilt operation Pull the lock lever D forward and adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position. Push the lock lever back to lock the steering wheel in place A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Telescopic operation Push the lock lever @) down and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward (4) to the desired position. Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place. A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv- Ssideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

SUN VISORS LPDO256| 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments @ Toblockglare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. © To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. © To block glare from the side and front, swing down the sub-sun visor. @ Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed À CAUTION + Do notstore the sun visor before return- ing it to its original position. e Store the main sun visor after storing the extension sun visor and sub-sun visor. + Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- edly downward. LPDO193 VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- call changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you When the inside MIRROR or AUTO switch is in the ON position, the indicator light © wil illumi- nate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally. With compass For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls" sec- tion of this manual. For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual. OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position. Move the small switch (© to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch @). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

A WARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MPA0008| LPDO196| Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped) Push the mirrors backward to fold them. Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped) À CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors. Press the switch to open or close the mirrors. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) The electric control type outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win- dow defogger switch to activate the heating [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped) The automatic drive positioner system has two features: Memory storage function © Entry/exit function (for automatic transmis- sion model only) LPDO197

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver's seat, steering col- umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission, set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position: For vehicles equipped with manual trans- mission, place the shift lever in the N (Neu- tral) position and set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

3. Adjust the drivers seat, steering column and

outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal air bags” section and “Steering wheel” and “Outside mirrors” earler in this section. During this step, do not tum the ignition to any positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and staÿ on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2). If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position À keyfob can be linked to a stored memory posi- tion with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-

tion. 3-20 Pre-di g checks and adjustments

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- onds, press the button on the keyfob. The indicator light will blink. After the indica- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that memory setting. With the key removed from the ignition switch, press the button on the keyfob. The driv- er's seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position. Confirming memory storage e Tum the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indica- tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec- onds. e_Ifthe battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver's door more than

&wo times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ-

ous procedure. Selecting the memorized position

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-

ver to the P (Park) position:

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second. The driver's seat, steering column and out- side mirrors will move to the memorized po- sition with the indicator light flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (for automatic transmission model) This system is designed so that the driver's seat and steering column will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily. (This feature is not available on manual transmis- sion model.) The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up e_ When the key is removed from the ignition switch. e_ When the drivers door is opened with the key turned to LOCK. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

When the key is tumed from ACC to LOCK with the drivers door open while the auto- matic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position: When the key is inserted into the ignition switch. + Whenthe drivers dooris closed with the key turned to LOCK. e When the key is turned from ACC to ON while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or can- celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems" in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems" section of this manual. SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: e_ when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h). e when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. when the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating e when the memory switch (1 or 2) is not pushed for at least 1 second. © when the seat has been already moved to the memorized position. e when no seat position is stored in the memory switch The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con- ditioner and audio systems” section of this manual Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

MEMO 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Control panel buttons — without navigation system... 4-2 Names of components ….… 48 How to use JOYSTICK and ENTER" button. .. 4-8 How to use “PREV" button éreeesseeses How to use “TRIP" button ............. How to use “FUEL ECON" button Clock ...... How to use “EM button . How to use nééir (maintenance) button . How to use the “SETTING" button. XD button... . Control panel buttons — with navigation system. . Names of the components. How to use joystick and “ENTER button. How to use “PREV" button Den Setting up the start-up screen How to use the “TRIP” button. . How to use the “SETTING” button... #2 button..…................................ Ventilators …..... re.4-14 Heater and a air conditioner (automatic) . 4-16 Automatic operation . Manual operation Operating tips... Servicing air conditioner. Audio system . Radio ... . FM radio reception … AM radio reception . Satellite radio reception … Audio operation precautions . FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player (Gipe AYCD. changer (Type B). . CD care and cleaning. . Steering wheel switch for audio control Antenna . Car phone or CB radio. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

A WARNING e Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and play controls should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation. e Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. In case you notice any foreign objec: the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. lgnoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

SEEK rracr _DI] hure [He CF LE: LHA0249) When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. 4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Reference symbols: “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con- trol panel [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

1. 2 brightness control button (P. 4-6)

PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3) . Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3) . SETTING button (P. 4-5) “ir (maintenance) button (P. 4-5) . TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3) FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4) . TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3)

9. E/M (English/metric) button (P. 4-4)

10. Clock adjust button (hours) (P. 4-4)

11. Clock adjust button (minutes) (P. 4-4)

To turn off the screen, push the #/2_ button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO". ® NH ®œ uw 8 &© ND

Finish setup: If you touch “PREV” button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over. 5:48 1 TIME 3# D6n BIST 48.1 oi CS) AVG 13nPH LHA0252

HOW TO USE “TRIP" BUTTON

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen. TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) — TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST, AVG) — OFF TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME — max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DIST — mile or km) and average speed (AVG — MPH or km/h). To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP” button or the “TRIP RESET” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

BUTTON The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km) and the distance to empty (dte — mi or km) wil_ appear on the screen when the “FUEL ECON? button is pushed. Average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km) The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RE- SET” or “FUEL ECON” button for more than approximatel 1.5 seconds. The display is updated every 30 seconds. For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display will show (----) Distance to empty (dte — mile or km) The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- ing calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the dte display will change to (*). NOTE: e_lfthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switchis OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- tinue to be displayed. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display. 4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems CLOCK The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readijust the time. Adjusting the time To adjust the time, push the “H” or “MP” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The time indicator will flash. Touch the “H button to adjust the hour. Touch the “M” button to adjust the minute. To finish the adjusting, press the “PREV” button or the screen will return to normal after 10 sec- onds.

HOW TO USE “E/M" BUTTON

You can change the unit as follows using the “E/M” (English/Metric) button. Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG Metrie — km, °C, L/100 km [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

To reset the driving distance, push the nr button or “TRIP RÉSET” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. To set the distance, push the joystick to left or right.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON Pushing the “SETTING” button will change the settings menu as follows:

Display ON/OFF To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the “Display ON/OFF" using the joystick. The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO". H YES key is selected using the joystick, the screen will tum off after a 2 beep sound and approximately 1 second. To tu on the screen, push the “SETTING” , trip control, air conditioner (except rear window de- fogger button) or audio button. Language The language can be changed to “English” or “Français” using the joystick Beep set If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using the joystick, the beep sound will not operate (except some caution beep sounds). Service alert If the service alert “ON” key is selected, the information will be displayed when the engine oil and the tire rotation periods reach the preset driving distance. Personalized settings menu You can set the following electronic systems operating conditions using the joystick. Slide back DR (driver’s) seat on exit: The driver's seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for exceptional ease of exit and entry. Remote unlock door logic: This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation: Only the driver's door +-— All the doors Horn chirp with remote: This option allows you to select the hom chirp mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

NOTE: 1f you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control. Lamps flash with remote: This option allows you to select the hazard indi- cator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed. NOTE: 1f you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control. Auto relock time: This option allows you to set the length of time before the doors lock with the auto re-lock func- tion. Auto headlamp sensitivity: This option allows you to set the sensitivity of the autolights. Auto headlamp off delay: This option allows you to select the length oftime before the autolights turn off. Speed sensing wiper interval: This option allows you to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion. Confirm reset settings: This option allows you to reset all options to their default settings. #/> BUTTON To change the display brightness, push the #12 button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left. I no operation is done within 10 seconds, or ifthe “PREV” button is pushed, the display wi return to the previous display. A WARNING e Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and display controls Should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation. 4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems e Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. e In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ign g such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

[ semne||,oësr |, @ |,roure) : Ü ED ne | QE 10 | _ nus TT 11 3 4 5 6 T8 9 10 11 LHAO254| the When you use this system, make sure the engine Reference symbols “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con- is running. 1f you use the system with the engine not trol panel. running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. “Display” key — This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

#1 brightness control button (P. 4-14) PREV (previous) button (P. 4-8) Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-8) SETTING button (P. 4-10) TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-8) DEST button* MAP button* Zoom out button* Zoom in button* ROUTE button* GUIDE VOICE button* “For Navigation system control buttons, refer to separate Navigation System Owner's Manual. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

This button has two functions. + Go back to the previous display (cancel). H you touch “PREV” button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. © Finish setup. If you touch this button after the setup is com- pléted, the setup will start over, and the display will return to the climate control or audio mode and Navigation screen.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. Read the waming and select the “I AGREE" (English) or “ENTER” (Français) key then push the “ENTER” button H you do not push the “ENTER” button, the Navigation system will not proceed to the next step display. I you do not touch the button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or START-UP screen, the screen will change to TRIP screen automatically. To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual. 4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Eepard Time Dneng Dance LHA0263

HOW TO USE THE “TRIP" BUTTON

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if there are any) — TRIP 1 (Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average Speed) — TRIP 2 — FUEL ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) — MAINTE- NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation) — OFF. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

Maintenance items You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation interval. To display the setting of the maintenance interval, select the “Engine Oi r “Tire Rotation” key using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button: To set the maintenance interval, select the “Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy- stick and push the joystick to right or left. To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re- set” key using the joystick and push the “EN- TER” button. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when set trip distance is reached, select the “Display Maintenance Notifica- tion” key and push the “ENTER” button. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

BUTTON The SETTING screen will appear when the “SETTING” button is pushed. Display settings The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af- ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting “Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but- ton. 4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Vehicle electronic systems The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec- tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push- ing the “ENTER” button To set the various electronic systems operating conditions, select the applicable item using the joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter- nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER” button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated — ON Indicator light is not iluminated — OFF [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

Automate Headighes OF Delay VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS I VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Ke Rene Response Lg [I Srod Depancant mn | Auto Re-Loëk Time O Renum A Serings to Detauk ere el Aa Heane LHAO260 LHAO261 Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle (au- tomatic transmission only): With this option ON, the driver's seat automati- call moves back and returns to the original po- sition for ease of exit and entry. Lift steering column when exiting vehicle (automatic transmission only): With this option ON, the steering column auto- matically tilts up and returs to the original posi- tion for ease of exit and entry. Remote unlock driver’s door first: This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation: Only the driver's door «——+ All the doors Keyless remote response — horn: This key allows you to change the hom chirp mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob. NOTE: If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control. Keyless remote response — lights: This key allows you to change the hazard indica- tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob. NOTE: If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control. Auto re-lock time: This key allows you to set the length of time before doors auto re-lock. Sensitivity of automatic headlights: This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the automatic headlights: © Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlights will take longer to come on when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Higher- more sensitive, automatic head- lights will come on quicker when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light. Automatic headlights off delay: This key allows you to set the length of time before the automatic headlights turn off after exiting the vehicle. Speed dependent wiper: This key allows you to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion. Return all settings to default: When this key is selected and turned on using the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE- HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default settings. LHA0262

SYSTEM SETTINGS I CLOCK SETTINGS

La Zur 1010 _ ne ÉSRORET- [a] Beep Getting D Dsyighe Savings Time (Cr | Select Time Zone LHA0270) System settings Language/Unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push- ing the “ENTER” button. Language: English or French Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG Metric — km, °C, L/100 km You can select the language and unit using the joystick and “ENTER?” button. 4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Clock Adijusting the time: Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. The time will change step by step. After completion of the setting, press the “PREV” button. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

-< Hours + -< Hours + =< Hours + 1040 -< Minutes > + 1040 -< Minutes > + 10419 -< Minutes > + (es me 1010 Au Adust (es me 1010 Au Adust (es me 1010 Auto Aduss D Osyight Ssvings Time D Oayight Ssvings Time D Dsyighe Savings Time Çrue [mener LHAO271 LHA0272 LHA0273 Setting daylight savings time: Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time. ON: The displayed time advances by 1 OFF: The current time is displayed. hour. Adjusting the time to the GPS: Select the “Auto Adjust” key. The time will be reset to the GPS time. Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

[TIME ZONE Pace Murean Central Easem Atlantis Nesoundand LHAO274 The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting. Beep setting With this option ON, a beep will sound if any audio button is pushed. > BUTTON To change the display brighiness, push the /2 button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left.

Select one of the following zones depending on the current location. © Pacific zone © Mountain zone © Central zone © Eastern zone + Atlantic zone © Newfoundland zone After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen will appear. 4-14 Display screen, heater, air con I no operation is done within 10 seconds, or ifthe “PREV” button is pushed, the display wil return to the previous display. joner and audio systems VENTILATORS LHAO255 Center Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides. Open or close the ventilators by using the dial. Move the dial toward the hollow circle to open the ventilators or toward the solid circle to close them. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

LHAO257 LHAO258 Rear Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

5. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button ° The air conditioner cooling function op-

6. S# (fan speed control) button erates only when the engine is running.

7... MODE (manual air flow control) button e Do not leave children, impaired adults,

8. Temperature control button (passenger or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot,

Sunny days, temperatures in a closed

9. DUAL (passenger side tempera- vehicle could quickly become high

t trol) ON/OFF but enough to cause severe or possibly fa- ure controy C utton tal injuries to people or animals.

10. Rear window defroster switch

11. &&> Aïrrecirculation button

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems + Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. e Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

down to set the desired temperature. e_Adjust the temperature display to about 75° F (24° C) for normal operation. e The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front pas-

senger side temperature using each tem- perature control button. When the DUAL button or passenger side temperature but- ton is pushed, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger side tempera- ture control, push the DUAL button. Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-

played and A/C indicator wi turn off.)

2. Push the temperature control button up or

down to set the desired temperature. e_ The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- tem may not work properly. e_ Not recommended if windows fog up. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Pushthe ÿ defroster button on. The in-

dicator light on the button will come on.

2. Push the temperature control button up or

down to set the desired temperature. e_ To quicklyremove ice from the outside ofthe windows, set the fan speed to maximum: e_ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode. © When the front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be tumed on at outside temperatures above 28°F (-5°C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dialis turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow control button is used to select a position other than ÿ position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The air recirculate mode au- tomatically tums off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging perfor- mance. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Push the fan control button #8 control the fan speed. to manually Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirulation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode. Fresh air Push the button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on. Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con- trolled automatically, To manually control the in- take air, push the air recirculate or fresh air but- ton. To return to the automatic control mode, push the same button for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh air buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically 4-17 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

Air flow control Pushing the MODE (manual air flow control) but- ton selects the air outlet to: 74 — Airflows from center and side ventilators. +4 — Airflows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. #3 — Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. To turn system off Push the OFF button. OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. 4-18 Display screen, heater, air con

WHA0209) The sunload sensor, located on the top passen- ger side of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any- thing on or around this sensor. joner and audio systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual. A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- mentall friendly” air conditioning system. A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Tu the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- ences. intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence ra reception quality. Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- ity of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char- acteristics are completely normal in a given re- ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be- cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve- hicles can work against ideal reception. De- scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30 miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single chan- nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is Within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter) static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signal, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also oceur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and 4-19 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable without factory satellite radio pre- wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna. DIGITAL AUDIO LHA 0099]

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Cassette player To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length. 4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of de- formed cassettes may cause the cas- sette to jam in the player. Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player. If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may col- lect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the resi- due is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Compact disc (CD) player Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light. CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly. The following CDs may not work prop- erly: + Copy control compact discs (CCCD) e Recordable compact discs (CD-R) e Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) e Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion: © 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

10. TAPE play/side select button

11. SAT (satellite) radio select button‘

12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BAL- FL He | mi PAUSE MUTE TUNE PROG CF LE: ANCE)

rQe n “No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the

| (a) SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- 14 stalled (late availability only/retrofit un- available without factory satellite radio 1h pre-wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUS"*

| TJ [| satellite radio service subscription is active. LHAO304

10. TAPE play/side select button

(BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE, SSV and NR (Dolby))

“No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- stalled (late availability only/retrofit un- available without factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUS"* satellite radio service subscription is active.

(Type AY/CD CHANGER (Type B) No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

antenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable without factory satellite radio pre- wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Audio main operation The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high fre- quency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Re- duction) system. The auto loudness circuit en- hances the low frequency range automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback. ON-OFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ON-OFF/Volume control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was tumed off. To tum the system off, press the ON.OFF/Volume control knob. Turn the ON-OFF/Volume control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume (SSV) for audio (type B only) . The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL- ANCE, (SSV and NR (Dolby) — Type B only)): Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows

BASS — TREBLE — FADE — BALANCE —

SSV (Type B only) — NR (when cassette playing, Type B only) To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. To change the SSV mode (Type B only) to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to right or left. To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON, turn the Tuning knob to right or left while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the OÙ mark is displayed. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li- cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo- ration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol DÙ are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD display reap- pears. Otherwise, the radio, cassette tape or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. Display CD text: To change the text displayed while playing a CD, press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap- pears. Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows: Track number +—— Track title «<—— Disc title — Track number Display satellite radio text: To change the text displayed while listening to satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until *Dis- play Mode” appears. Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows: Channel number +—— Channel name +— Artist «— Title —— Channel number Pause/mute button: To mute or pause the audio sound, push the PAUSE/MUTE button. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

To release the mute or pause, push the button again. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM/SAT radio select: Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select button will change the band as follows: AM <— FM or SAT (Satellite) When FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the ON-OFF/Volume control knob is depressed to ON. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit unavailable without factory satellite radio pre- wiring), and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact disc or tape will automatically be tumed off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. <<» | TUNE uning): A WARNING The radio should not be tuned while driv- ing so full attention may be given to ve- hicle operation. To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button Cor BR) or turn the tuning knob to right or left. To move qui irough the channels, hold either the € or BB button down for more than

QD | SEEK tuning: ush the SEEK button ( M or Bl )forless than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low 1 high frequencies and stop at the next broad- casting station SCAN tuning: Push the M or B1 button for more than

1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station

for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. lf the or Pl button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Station memory operations: 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT radio to the À, B and C preset button

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 - 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.)

8. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Radio data system (RDS) (if so equipped): RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad- cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

RDS can display: © Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3". «Station name, such as “The Groove”. Music or programming type such as “Clas- sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”. «Traffic reports about delays or construction H the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed. Program type (PTY): PTY can be used to search for a certain program type. Certain areas have a limited number of stations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans- mit call letters and frequencies only. Searching or scanning by program type may yield a limited number of selections. When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is dis- played. During this time if the PTY data code is zero or the data is unreadable, the display will show NONE. To change the PTY:

chose a specific program type. Refer to the illustration. The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?" joner and audio systems SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push the

SEEK button ( I or 1 )for less than

1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning to

the PTY station will start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second pe- riod, the PTY mode will be canceled. SCAN tuning:

4. Push the M or Pl button for more

than 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY name stations and stop at each broadcasting sta- tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the M or 1 button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Cassette tape player operation Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A WARNING Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could damage the player. H the system is tumed off by pushing the ON-OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape stil in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on. PLAY: When the TAPE button is pushed with the system tumed off and a tape already loaded, the system will come on and the tape will play. + Whenthe TAPE button is pushed with either the radio or compact disc tumed on and a tape already loaded, the compact disc or the radio will automatically be tumed off and the tape will play. When the TAPE button is pushed with a TAPE playing, the tape will play the program recorded on the reverse side. << DD | REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): Push the 44 (rewind) button to rewind the tape. Pushthe RR_ (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. Either the REW or FF symbol iluminates on the display window. To stop the REW or FF function, press the 44 (rewind) or bR (fast forward) again, or press the TAPE button. APS (Automatic Program D pl Search) REW, APS FF: When the (APS REW) button is pushed once for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the program being played will start over from the beginning. Push the M (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selec- tions. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed. When the B1 (APS FF) button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the next program will start to play from the beginning, Pushthe Bt (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 programs). Either the REW or FF symbol flashes on the display window while searching for the selection When pushing the (APS REW) or Pl (APS FF) button for more than 1.5 seconds, each program will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the 1 button again. This system searches for the blank intervals be- tween selections. there is a blank interval within à program or there is no interval between pro- grams, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the tape is played, the tape program play is repeated. To stop the repeat play, push the PROG/RPT play button again. Metal or chrome tape usage: The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape. TAPE EJECT: When Æ button is pushed with a tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When a tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be turned off. Compact disc (CD) player operation (Type A) ACAUTION + Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer. Tum the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically tu off and the compact disc will play. the system has been turned off while the com- pact disc was playing, pushing the ON.OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc.

3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also be

used without an adapter. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will tum on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be tumed off and the compact disc will start to play. REW (Rewind), FF (Fast RICE When the 44 (rewind) button or BR (fast forward) is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. RES When the button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

track being played retums to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. When the BI button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

next track will start to play from its beginning Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times: the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When the M or B button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the Bi button. SEEK/TRACK: 4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT — 1 TRACK RPT — 1 DISC RDM

ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated 1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly A | CDEIECT: Whenthe Æ button is pushed with the com- pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected When Æ buttonis pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. If the compact disc ejects and is not re- moved, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs). CDIN indicator: CDN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (ype B) À CAUTION + Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player. e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer. Tum the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. To insertthe disc, first push the LOAD button. If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically tu off and the compact disc will play. the system has been tued off while the com- pact disc was playing, pushing the ON.OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc. LOAD button: To insert a CD inthe CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 - 6), then insert the CD. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the tape orthe radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be tumed off and the compact disc will start to play. 44 | DD] REW Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): When the 44 (rewind) or BR (fast for- ward) button is pushed while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc will play while rewind- ing or fast forwarding . When the button is re- leased, the compact disc will retum to normal play speed. RES When the M button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. SEEK/TRACK: When the 1 button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,

the next track will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When pushing the M or Pl button for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the Mi button again. CD select buttons: To play another CD that has been loaded, push a CD select button (1 - 6). REPEAT (RPT): When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT — 1 DISC RPT— 1 TRACK RPT — ALL DISC RDM — 1 DISC RDM — ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: Al discs loaded will be repeated. 1 DISC RPT: The disc thatis currently playing will be repeated. 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomiy 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- rently playing will be played randomly Æ& | CDEJECT: Current disc: e Pressthe Æ button. The compact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (ex- cept 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs). Select a disc: Press the slot number (1 - 6) for the desired disc, then pressthe Æ button. The com- pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter com- pact discs). All discs: e Press and hold the Æ button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. f a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the Æ button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed. 4-30 Display screen, heater, air con When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. CD IN indicator: The slot numbers (1 - 6) will iluminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer. joner and audio systems LHA0049)

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used! To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. LHA0269) Volume control switch MODE select switch POWER on/off switch . Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on/off switch With the ignition key tumed to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off.

MODE select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: AM, FM, SAT, CD and Tape. Volume control switches Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume. VIA Memory change (radio): Tuning Push the tuning switch ( V7 _or ZX )forless than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch ( V7 or ZX ) for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- ous radio station. FF, REW (tape and CD): Push the tuning switch ( V7 or ZX )forless

1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. The automatic program search searches for the blank intervals between selections on cassette tapes. there is a blank interval within a program Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. When playing a tape, push the tuning switch CV or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape. To stop the FF or REW function, pressthe NV” or button for less than 1.5 seconds again. When playing a CD in the CD changer (if so equipped), push the tuning switch (V7 or 2) for more than 1.5 seconds to change between discs when multiple CDs are loaded ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window. ACAUTION e Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep- tion or noise. e When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth. 4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad- versely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection) system and other electronic parts. A WARNING A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be le operation. Some juris- dictions prohi he use of cellular tele- phones while driving. e If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so. ACAUTION e Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the Engine Control Module (ECM). [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the an- tenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

MEMO 4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving. . Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .……. Three-way catalyst. Avoiding collision and rollover. Drinking alcohol/drugs and ring. Ignition switch. . een Automatic transmission. Manual transmission . Key positions … Nissan vehicle immobilzer system (NVIS) Before starting the engine . Starting the engine Driving the vehicle . Automatic transmission (if so equipped). Manual transmission .................. Parking brake . …. Cruise control (if so equipped).. Precautions on cruise control . Cruise control operations. Break-in schedule ..…... Increasing fuel economy Parking/parking on hills. Power steering Brake system Brake precautions Anti-lock brake system (ABS). Traction control system (TCS) (if so lequipped) Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system (if so equipped) . Cold weather driving. Freeing a frozen door lock . Anti-freeze............. Battery … Draining of coolant water Tire equipment Special winter equipment Driving on snow or ice . . Engine block heater (if so equipped). [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

AND DRIVING A WARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) A WARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- ous. lt can cause unconsciousness or death. 5-2 Starting and driving e If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. © Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart- ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the © air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. e If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommen- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- try into the vehicle. The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartiment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un- derbody, or rear of the vehicle. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are bumed at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. A WARNING e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

À CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. e Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tion: the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other un- usual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. e Do not race the engine while warming it up. e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed comering, or sudden steering ma- neuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a coll n with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- duces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohot-related accidents. Al- though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- Scription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. Starting and dri [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

IGNITION SWITCH OFF WSD0041| AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION On automatic transmission models, the ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be tumed to LOCK position and removed until the shift selec- tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) position. 1 the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be move to the LOCK position. When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key. 5-4 Starting and driving

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)

2. Tu the ignition key slightly toward the ON

8. Tum the key to the LOCK position

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch The shift selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the bat- tery is discharged. The shift selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be tumed about 1/8 of a tum clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left. A WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK ii driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

OFF WSD0058| MANUAL TRANSMISSION The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driv- ing. The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. On manual transmission models, to turn the igni- tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON position, tum the key to OFF, push the key in, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a tum clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left. A WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. KEY POSITIONS LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1) The engine can be tured off without locking the steering wheel ACC: (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running, ON: Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START: (4) This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. lt automati- call returns to the ON position

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NVIS key. Ithe engine fails to start using the registered NVIS key, it may be due to interference caused by an- other NVIS key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 5 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference) Separate from the registered NVIS key. I this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer- ence from other devices. Starting and driving 5-5 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. © Check that all windows and lights are clean. e_ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. + Position seat and adjust head restraints. e_Adjust inside and outside mirrors. e_ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See “Waming/indicator lights and audible re- minders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 5-6 Starting and driving

. Apply the parking brake. . Automatic transmission: Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions. Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully de- pressed. . Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. el the engine is very hard to start in ex- tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accel- erator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ing the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. À CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-8 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) A WARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until sl g is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. + Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. © Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. À CAUTION + When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC posi n or if the key is removed. Starting and driving 5-7 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

WSD0076 Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position. A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. Ifthe key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or 5-8 Starting and driving any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- tion key to the LOCK position to remove the key. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the se- lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse): ACAUTION Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use this position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 3 (Third gear): Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta- geous. 2 (Second gear): Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak- ing on downhill grades. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above 60 MPH (96 km/h). Do not exceed 60 MPH (96 km/h) in the 2 position. 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downthill grades. Do not shift into the 1 position at speeds above 37 MPH (60 km/h). Do not exceed 37 MPH (60 km/h) in the 1 position. O Z 2 LSD0071 Manual shift mode When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu- all. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis- played on the position indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth) Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1— M2 — M3 — M4 — M5 M5 (Fifth): Use this position for all normal forward driving. M4 (Fourth): For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. M3 (Third) and M2 (Second): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhil grades. M1 (First): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. + Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy. When shifting up: Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) When shifting down: Move the selector lever to the — (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) e_ The transmission will automatically shift the gears between the 1st and the selected Starting and driving 5-9 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 110/07/03—tbrooks =:

range. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift up or down between the 1st and 3rd gears.) + Movingthe selector leverrapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. When canceling the manual shift mode: Retum the selector lever to the D position to retum the transmission to the normal driving mode. e _Inthe manual shift mode, the transmis- jon may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving perfor- mance and reduces the chance of ve- hicle damage or loss of control. e _Inthe manual shift mode, the transmis- sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the en- gine speed is too high. When the ve- le speed decreases, the transmis- n automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. 5-10 Starting and driving LSD0072| Shift lock release Ifthe battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the shift selector lever, release the shift lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the

steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- matic transmission system as soon as possible. A WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Accelerator downshift — in D position — For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. Fail-safe When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note that the 4-speed automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. For the 5-speed automatic transmission, the transmission will be locked in any of the gears according to the condition. If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are fun ning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating con- dition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if nec- essary. MANUAL TRANSMISSION A WARNING e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. e Do not over-rev the engine when shift- ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage. À CAUTION e Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. e Fully depress the clutch pedal before Shifting to help prevent transmission damage. e Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). e When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. LSD0073| Shifting To change gears, or when upshifting or down shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. Ifthe clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur Starting and driving 5-11 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 8rd, Ath and Sth up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed. To back up, lift up on the reverse lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st). Suggested upshift speeds The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For quick acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 #t [1,219 mJ) and normal accelera- tion in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1,219 ml): GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 15 (24) And to 3rd 25 (40) 8rd to 4th 40 (64) Ath to Sth 45 (72) Sth to 6th 50 (80) 5-12 Starting and dr For quick acceleration in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft[1,219 mj): GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 8rd 25 (40) 8rd to 4th 40 (65) Ath to Sth 45 (75) Sth to 6th 50 (80) Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will en- sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. GEAR MPH (km/h) 1st 35 (65) 2nd 60 (95) 8rd - Ath - Sth - éth - PARKING BRAKE A WARNING e Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. e Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. + Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button and lower com- pletely ®).

4. Before driving, be sure the brake waming

CONTROL e _lfthe cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. e_lfthe SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. SON Starting and driving 5-13 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following pro- cedures. A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. © In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. e On winding or hilly roads. © On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). © In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. 5-14 Starting and dr À CAUTION On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off imme- diately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- tween 30 - 90 MPH (48 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment panel comes on. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. e_ To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. e_ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods. e_ Pushthe CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out. © Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out. © Tum the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out. The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: © you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. ® the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. © you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- mission), or move the shift selector lever to N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. e Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de- sire, release the switch © Push and release the RES/ACCEL switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. e_Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- hicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. + Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed de- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the RES/ACCEL switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). BREAK-IN SCHEDULE À CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en- sure the future reliabi and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short- ened engine life and reduced engine performance. © Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. e Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. © Avoïd quick starts. e_Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

e Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. © Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. © Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- hicles. e_ Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. e_ Avoid unnecessary engine idling. e_ Keep your engine tuned up. © Follow the recommended periodic mainte- nance schedule. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. e_ Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. e Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. Starting and driving 5-15 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

© When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. «Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- tion” in “Technical and consumer informa- tion” later in this manual. 5-16 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WSD0050| A WARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. e Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmis- sion models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

+ Donot leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi- tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.

8. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

+ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: @

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gentiy touches the curb. © HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: Tum the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. e HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: © Tum the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen- ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key. POWER STEERING The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. I the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effortis needed, especially in sharp tumns and at low speeds. A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power as: for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate. Starting and driving [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- tance will be longer. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear outthe brake linings and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. 5-18 Starting and driving A WARNING e While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctiy. Parking brake bedding The parking brake shoes must be “bedded down” whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance. This procedure is described inthe vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main- tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv- ing and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Normal operation The anti-lock brake system does not operate at speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The speeds vary according to road conditions.) When driving, the anti-lock brake system con- trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak- [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve- hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The system detects the wheel rotation rate and elec- tronically controls the pressure applied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom- panied by noise usually occurs while the ABS system is operating. Such vibration and noise encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob- lem, but indicates that the system is functioning properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. Self-test feature The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsa- tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system off and tumns on the ABS brake waming light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti- lock assistance. H a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti- lock function will not operate, but the standard vehicle brake system will continue to operate normally. The ABS brake warning light will then come on. Hthe light comes on during the self-test or while driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for repair. A WARNING e The anti-lock brake system is a sophis- ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac- cidents resulting from careless or dan- gerous dri techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery sur- faces will be longer than on normal surfaces even the anti-lock brake system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov- ered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. Always maintain a safe distance from the ve- hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re- ty for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. e Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the speci- fied size of tires on all four wheels. + Wheninstalling a spare tire, make sure is the proper size and type as speci- on the tire placard. For tire placard location information, refer to “Tire plac- ard” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- tion of this manual. Starting and driving 5-19 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (if so equipped) When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while accelerating. + When the traction control system is operat- ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks. e_Ifthe slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un- der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive careully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- tion control off indicator light” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual. e If à malfunction occurs in the system, the SLIP and indicator _ lights come on in the meter panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the trac- tion control function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system. 5-20 Starting and dr A WARNING e The traction control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully. e If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the traction control system may not operate properly and the GA indicator light may come on. + Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the traction con- trol system may not operate properly and the Ge indicator light may come on. + When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the traction control system may not op- erate properly and the Gé indi light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads. + If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the traction control system may not operate prop- erly and the indicator light may come on. «+ The traction control system is not a sub- stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability. e When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks. © When onlythe traction control system (TCS) potion of the vehicle dynamic control sys- tem is operating, the slip indicator will also blink. e_Ifthe slip indicator blinks, the road condi- tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section. © indicator light I malfunction occurs in the system, the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel. As long as these warning lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction. The ABLS system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system off, all VDC and TCS functions will be turned off. The ABLS system and ABS will still operate with the VDC system OFF. the ABLS system or the ABS is activated, the slip indicator light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal. While the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop- ery. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. A WARNING e The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stabil- ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully. e If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the vehicle dynamic control e Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely dete- riorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on. Starting and driving 5-21 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

e When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as her banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads. + If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- namic control system may not operate and the vehicle dynamic con- dicator light may come on. e The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. 5-22 Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole. ANTI-FRÉEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection: For details, see “Engine cooling system" in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual BATTERY the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “Changing engine coolant” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on al four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa- tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

8. Tire chains may be used.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord- ing to location. Check the local laws before installng tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's sug- gestions. Use only SAE Class “S” Chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clear- ances between the tire and the closest ve- hicle suspension or body component re- quired to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain ten- sioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure à tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibil- ity of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. lf possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: e_A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. e_A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. e_ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowsdrifts. © Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW ORICE

A WARNING e Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under ons. Try to avoid driving on the road is salted or sanded. + Whatever the condition, drive with cau- tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. e Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. e Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. e Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. e Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads. e Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold temperature starting is available through a NISSAN dealer. A WARNING Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical Shock if you use an ungrounded connection. Starting and driving 5-23 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

MEMO 5-24 Starting and driving

• 6 In case of emergency Flat tire Changing a flat tire Jump starting
• Push starting p. 6
• -2 p. 6
• -2 p. 6
• -6 -8 If your vehicle overheats . Towing your vehicle ee Towing recommended by NISSAN …… Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma = p. 6

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- low. Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to wam other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person- nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. A WARNING e Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto- matic transmission into P (Park). 6-2 In case of emergency + Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance. WCE0044| Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks (D at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire © to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Getting the spare tire and tools Type À Type B Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover. Remove the jack (D and wheel nut wrench () from the tool box. Remove the spare tire. In case of emergency 6-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

Jack-up point and rt *? | D - CE1089) Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire A WARNING + Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. 6-4 In case of emergency

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. Th especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

TURN by hand Raise the vehicle LCEO020| WCE0056| Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc- tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

8. Toliftthe vehicle, securely hold the jacklever

and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re- move the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight. In case of emergency 6-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (@), ®), ©, ©), ®)). Lower the vehicle completely. A WARNING e Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- hicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-Ib (108 N:m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to Specifications at each lubrication interval. 6-6 In case of emergency Adijust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor

carpeting over the damaged tire.

A WARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se- cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. e The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. See specific instructions un- der the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol- lowed. A WARNING e If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. e Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vi ty of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme- diately flush the contacted area with water. e Keep battery out of the children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. reach of [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

+ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury. e Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. A WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. Ifthe booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat- teries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (®, ®, ©, ®). In case of emergency 6-7 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/21/03—betty =1

À CAUTION © Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (—) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com- partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started ACAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nectthe negative cable and then the positive cable. 6-8 In case of emergency

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. PUSH STARTING A WARNING + Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. This may cause transmission or other ve- hicle damage. e Three-way catalyst equipped models Should not be started by pushing. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. + Never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward Surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps. A WARNING e Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. e To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. e Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

8. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

A WARNING 1f steam or water is coming from the en- gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- gine. A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, checkthe cool-

ant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer. In case of emergency 6-9 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. incorrect towing equipment could dam- age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera- tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. I is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions: A WARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. ACAUTION e When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powerti are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. e Always attach safety chains before towing. 6-10 In case of emergency For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing" in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual. ACEO511

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

ACE1001 ACAUTION e Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels. e When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual trans- mission models with the front wheels on the ground: e Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- ion, and secure the steeril in a straight-ahead po: rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by tur the nition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. e Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position. e When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake. LCE0077| VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) Front A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. e Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. In case of emergency 6-11 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

À CAUTION e Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the ve- hicle body will be damaged. e Use the towing hook only to free a ve- hicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long dis- tance using only the towing hook. e The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the hook at an angle. e Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems. e Pull devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. 6-12 In case of emergency Rear

A WARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. A CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle. Pull devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior .…........................ Washing Waxing.…...... Removing spots … Underbody .……......... Glass ......... Aluminum alloy wheels .… Chrome parts... Cleaning interior.… 7-2 Floor mats .....................................7-4 Seat belts …......... 7-5 Corrosion protection. ue ee. 7-5 Most common factors contributing to vehicle COTOSION ...................................... 7-5 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion... . 7-5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . 7-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can: e_ after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. e_ after driving on coastal roads. when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. when dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. 7-2 Appearance and care À CAUTION e Do not wash the vehicle strong household soap, strong chemical deter- gents, gasoline or solvents. + Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. e Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughiy with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regular. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. À damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. After wax- ing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a “weathered” ap- pearance. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. © Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash- ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. e_Ifthe surface does not polish easily, use a “road tar” remover and wax again. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated. LAI0008 GLASS When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean ifthe high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. To remove the high-mounted stop light @ Push toward rear of vehicle. @ Lift to remove. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. ACAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri- cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win- ter months in areas where road sal is used. If not removed, road salt could discolor the wheels. CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with à non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. Appearance and care 7-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with à clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fab- ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. À CAUTION e Never use benzine, thinner or any si lar material. e Small particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean- ing fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish. + Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ommended by the manufacturer. e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- age the lens cover. 7-4 Appearance and care FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- come excessively worn. WAI000| Floor mat positioning aid (driver's side only) This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve- hicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwel. Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks =:

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal air bags” section of this manual. A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. CORROSION PROTECTION

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated: ein areas of high relative humidity. ©_in areas where the temperatures stay above freezing. © _ where atmospheric pollution exists. e_ where road salt is used. Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION © Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. e_ Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. e_ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. © Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. Appearance and care 7-5 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

À CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and_deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corro- sion, which may be required in some areas, con- sult a NISSAN dealer. 7-6 Appearance and care [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Maintenance requirements. Spark plugs. General maintenance . Replacing spark plugs - Explanation of general maintenance items Air cleaner. In-cabin microfiter. Windshield wiper blades . Cleaning Replacing . Parking brake and brake pedal Checking parking brake .… Checking brake pedal. Brake booster. Fuses .…..... Engine compartment. Passenger compartment Keyfob battery replacement . Lights... Headights.…… Exterior and interior lights. Wheels and tires …. Tire pressure... Maintenance precautions.… eee Engine compartment check locations .! Engine cooling system .…...... Checking engine coolant level Changing engine coolant . Engine oil.… Checking engine oil level . Changing engine oil . Changing engine oi filter . 4-speed automatic transmission fluid | Temperature conditions for checking. … 5-speed automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid. Brake and clutch fluid... Brake fluid. . Clutch fluid . Window washer fluid . Window washer fluid reservoir Tire labeling. Battery . Types of tires.…... Jump string - Tire chains.…..... Drive belts . Changing wheels and tires [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some daÿ-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- SAN's good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. I is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- nance chain. Scheduled maintenance For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide." You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op- ration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- eration. lt is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. 8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualiied technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economic way. GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per- formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptiy. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this sec: Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequentiy Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel alignment and balance [f the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a Straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. Ifthe steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. © For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per- forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- hicle, etc. Additional information on the following items with an “*”’ is found later in this sec- tion. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free travel. Parking brake* Check that the lever has the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt web- bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel Check for changes inthe steer- ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out ofthe defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel) Automatic transmission fluid level* Check the level after putting the selector lever in P with the engine idling at operating temperature. Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. 8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected imme- diately. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. Underbody The underbody is frequently ex- posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thor- oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual. Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed. A WARNING e Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neu- tral). For automatic transmission mod- els, move the selector lever to P (Park). e Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. + Never leave the engine or automatic ion related component har- connected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. e Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. e Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the

ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- Sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and Sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. ACAUTION + Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. AI- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail- able. See “Owner's Manual/Service Manual or- der information” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplet or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

8. Brake fluid reservoir

8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)

9. Engine oil dipstick

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity. LDI0330] 8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

The engine cooling system is filed at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool- ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors; therefore, additional engine cooling system additives are not neces- sary. A WARNING e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. e The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. Outside temperature Genuine | Demineral- down to NISSAN ized or dis- Long Lite | tilled water — = Anti-freeze ce F Coolant or equivalent -35 -30 50% 50% À CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as or- ange, may damage the engine cooling system. WD10332

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing. A WARNING + To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot. e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ENGINE OIL LDI0329] WDI0175

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks (®). This is the normal oper- ating oil level range. K the oil level is below the L (Low) mark (@), remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill ©.

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

À CAUTION Oil level should be checked regular; erating the engine with an insuffi amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. WDI0216|

Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. … Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun- terclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. I the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter” later in this section. A WARNING e Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. + Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. ACAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. e Waste oil must be disposed of prop- erly. e Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer, Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-Ib (29 - 39 N-m)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filer opening, then install the oil filer cap securely. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. 8-10 Maintenance and do WDI0218|

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply

2. Turn the engine off.

8. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Loosen the oi filer with an oil fiter wrench

by tuning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. À CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the mounting surface of the engine Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is fe, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

4-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID A WARNING e When the engine is running, keep hands, jewelry and clothing away from any moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belts. e Automatic transmission fluid is poison- ous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. LDI0321|

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR

CHECKING The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: — The engine should be warmed up to op- erating temperature. — The vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. — The automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C). © The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera- tures of 86 - 122°F (80 - 50°C) using the COLD range on the dipstick after the engine is warmed up and before driving. However, the fluid should be re-checked using the HOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set

selector lever through each gear range, end- ing in P (Park)

8. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tube

as far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If

the automatic transmission fluid level is within the normal operating range ®), no additional fluid is required. the fluid level is low @ add fluid through the dipstick tube. 8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself À CAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dexron"" IIl/Mercon"“ the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for mort formation regarding suitable fluids, cluding recommended brand(s) of Dexron" Ill/Mercon" automatic trans- mission fluid. NOTE: If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu- rately. You should wait until the fluid has cooled down (about 30 minutes) before checking fluid level. 5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. A WARNING e Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic trans- mission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

WD10256 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- tures of 32° - B6°F (0° - 30°C). H the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill through the opening. À CAUTION ° DO NOT OVERFILL. e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Genuine

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability. À CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the pa If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. LDI0079| BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LDI0080 CLUTCH FLUID Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir (manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre- quently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants" in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. 8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability. À CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

RESERVOIR Fillthe window washerfluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the light comes on (if so equipped). To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lit the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's in- structions for the mixture ratio. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win- dow washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent. A CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint. + Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while g the window washer reser- voir tank. + Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water. BATTERY © Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solu- tion of baking soda and water. e Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. e_lfthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. A WARNING + Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- ated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. e Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. + When working on or near a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. e Battery posts, terminals and related ac- cessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash hands after handling. e Keep battery out of the reach of children. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver

as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require fréquent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting" in the “In case of emergency" section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

A WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each bel for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. SPARK PLUGS Platinum - tipped WD10005

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol- low the maintenance schedule, but do not reuse the spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. e Always replace spark plugs with rec- ommended or equivalent ones. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/22/03—betty =1

A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. ACAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, please see your NISSAN dealer for assistance. 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself AIR CLEANER LDI0336) The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth. To remove the air cleaner filter: @ Loosen the screw. @ Disconnect the electrical connector. © Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter. A WARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth- ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine bacli itisn’tthere, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. + Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals. To replace the filter, perform the following proce- dure: [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit

by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot- tom of the cover. NOTE: The filter is marked “UP” with an arrow. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle.

3. Slide the filter into the housing.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

MICRO FILTER Housing Cover Housing LDI0157 8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself NOTE: Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper

tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip.

5. Install the glove box door.

Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

WDI0194| CLEANING H your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside ofthe windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind- shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

AACRUTION arm until it clicks into place. Worn windshield wiper blades can dam- age the windshield and impair driver

REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. ACAUTION e After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. + Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam- aged from wind pressure. @ Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. @ Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. @® Remove the wiper blade. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

WD10337 | Be careful not to let anything get into the washer nozzle @). This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If something gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0326) WDI0229|

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. the number of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. e_7-8 clicks under pulling force of 44 Ib (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance À between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. K it is out of the range shown, see à NISSAN dealer. Distance A: Under depression force of 110 Ib (490 N) Automatic Manual Transmission Transmission 3 1/2 in (90 mm) 3 1/8 in (84 mm) or more or more [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or notthe brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible ifthe wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte- nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”. BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release the

brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the

engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-

pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is re- leased from the booster. I the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. FUSES LDI0327 ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. I any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

2. Open the engine hood.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passenger compartment. WDI0200]|

5. Ifthe fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. Fusible links the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts. 8-24 Maintenance and do [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LDI0328] PASSENGER COMPARTMENT À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

H the fuse is open, replace it with a known good fuse. . Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

WPD0136| Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: @ Open the lid using a coin: @ Remove the battery. 8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself © Install a new battery with the “+" facing down. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalent. @ Close the lid securely.

5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCK

button two or three times to check the key- fob operation: If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. e The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb A WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they pro- duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disas- semble. Always have your xenon head- lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section. Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be- cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your NISSAN dealer. A CAUTION e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer. + Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed. + Only touch the plastic base when han- dling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could sig- nificantly affect bulb life and/or head- ht performance. e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. e Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Low beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012* High beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012* *: Always check with the Parts Depart- ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Map light Rear personal lights Step light Comering light Rear combination light License plate light Trunk light High-mount stoplight .… Headlamp assembly

LDI0391| Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

LDI0339 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal ft Indicates bulb installation 8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Front personal/map lights — Type A Use a cloth ® to protect the housing. Front personal/map lights — Type B Use a cloth ® to protect the housing. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

WD10340 LDIO341 Vanity mirror light Use a cloth (© to protect the housing. Step light Use a cloth (D to protect the housing.

WD10342 Rear personal light Use a cloth ® to protect the housing. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

ME RDON LDI0397 Rear console box light Squeeze the tabs on the connector. Pull out the bulb. 8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WD10343 Trunk light WD10344 High-mounted stop light [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label (this label is also known as the tire placard) under the "Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affxed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: Most tires naturally lose air over time. e_ Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Incorrect tire pressure, including under in- flation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. A WARNING e Improperly inflated tires can fail sud- denly and cause an accident. e The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling character s and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. e Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the pressures are at the specified level. e Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

50 mPH, 80 km. TIRE S2 FRONT We] HEAR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION omenshns | avanr sn | Anmenc sn || nusanonaune vresse EE — MAX 50 MPH, 80 km ( PEOGEXR (a EN [F1 ) Ce [E3| )f [pousuEs DETaLS se nerenen AU MANUEL DU CONDUCTEUR. LDI0390 type b Tire and loading information label (for US) @ Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that should be seated in the ve- hicle. This example shows 2 for front seats, 3 for rear seats, total 5 occupants. @ Vehicle load limit: See loading information in the Technical and consumer information section. @® Original tire size: The size of the tires origi- naly installed on the vehicle at the factory. @ Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best tire wear and vehicle handling characteristics based on the ve- hicles GVWR. @® Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling" later in this section. @® and @. Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped) Maintenance and do-i [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposi- tion the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem

8-36 Maintenance and do and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. yourself

5. Add air to the tire as needed. too much air

is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, includ-

ing the spare. Size Cold Tire Infla- tion Pressure Front P225/55R17 | 230 kPa, 38 PSI Original Tire P245/45R18 | 220 kPa, 32 PSI Rear P225/55R17 | 230 kPa, 38 PSI Original Tire P245/45R18 | 220 kPa, 32 PSI Spare Tire T145/80°17 420 kPa, 60 PSI WD10394| TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

1. P: The "P' indicates the tire is designed for

width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number: This number, known as

the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

4. R:The "R’ stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number: This number is the wheel

or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number: This number is

the tire's load index. lt is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires be- cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should not drive the

vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of

Transportation.” The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's identifica-

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

8-38 Maintenance and do yourself

6. Four numbers represent the week and year

the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2008. (8) Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. (4) Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pres- sure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. (5) Maximum load rating This number indicate the maximum load in kilo- grams and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. (6) Term of "tubeless” or "tube type” Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type") or not (“tubeless”). (7) The word "radial” The word "radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure. (8) Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a white- wall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a par- ticular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

A WARNING e When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type ., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and avail- ability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rat- ing of the tire. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- els to provide good performance all year, includ- ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry road. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S" on the tire sidewall. I you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires I snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. H you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. TIRE CHAINS Use oftire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S" chains are de- signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the pos- sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor- mance may be adversely affected. Maintenance and do: yourself 8-39 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. 8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WDI0258|

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flat tire” in the “ln case of emergency" section of this manual for tire replacing proce- dures. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-Ib (108 N-m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. A WARNING e After rotating the tires, check and ad- just the tire pressure. e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- hicle has been driven for 600 mil (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). e Do not include the spare ti rotation. e For additional information regarding es, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- mation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. in the tire [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Tire wear and damage A WARNING e Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. e The original tires have buil tread wear indicators. When the wear indica- tors are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, con- tact a NISSAN dealer. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. A WARNING ° Theuse oftires other than those recom- mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to- tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these ef- fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- cs and/or the brake interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

+ Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. e The use of retread tires is not recommended. e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- anced as required. Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet . 8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Care of wheels © Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. © Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. e_ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. e_Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. e NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped) Obsenve the following precautions if the TEM- PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident: A WARNING The spare tire should be used for emer- gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor- tunity to avoid possible tire or differen- tial damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid Sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare re installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use e chains only on the front (original) tires. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. À CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam- age to the vehicle. Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

MEMO 8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants Fuel recommendation . . Engine oil and oil flter recommendation Recommended SAE viscosity number . Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations … Specifications... Engine … Wheels and tires . Dimensions and weights When traveling or rgisterng your vehicle in another country 9-9 Vehicle identification . 9-9 Vehicle identification number (IN) plate . .9-9 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) .…........................... Engine serial number... FM.VS.S. certification label .…............. Emission control information label ............... 9-10 Tire placard. Air conditioner specification label. Installing front license plate .… Vehicle loading information Terms .…....... Determining vehicle load capacity Loading tips Towing a trailer . Maximum load limits .…. Towing load/specification chart : Towing safety .................. Flat towing. Uniform tire quality grading Emission control system warranty Reporting safety defects (US only) Readiness for inspection/maintenance (1/M) test Ovwner's Manual/Service Manual order information .… .9-20 In the event of a collision .......................9-21 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. (Capacity (Approïimate) act (App' ? Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 758 Unieaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)" 1 Engine oil'8 Drain and Refll With oi flter change 4-14 gt #12 40 API Certification Mark 2 *3 “API grade SL, Energy Consening *2 ‘8 Wihout ai filer change 3-78 at ETES 37 LLSRO grade GPA 3 Cooling system 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Ant-freeze Coclant or equivalent Wih reservoir 85/8 74 at 82 809% Démineralzed or dti rater ® Manual transmission gear oil 4-78 pt apt 23 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ Mu 75W-85 or equivalent ‘Automatic transmission fluid Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental US. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Trans- 2 2 punto the proper vel accorcing toto iatuctioneinthe MS Fld4 5 Speed “Maintenance and do-i- yourself" section, Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF *5 Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent"9 Brake and cltch fuid Genuine NISSAN Super Heawy Duty Brake Fluid'6 or equivalent DOT 8 (US FMVSS No. 116) Muti-purpose grease = = = NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) Ai conditioning system refnigerant = = = HFC-184a (R-184a)°7 Ai conditioning system lubricants = = = NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent 7 Windshield washer fluid = = = Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent TT: For funher details, see Fuel recommendation” “2: For further detals, see “Engine oi and ol fiter recommendations. “3: For furiher detals, see "Recommended SAE engine ol viscosiy ‘4: Dexron” lMercon” or equivalent may also be used. Quiside the Continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluide, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron* Î/Mercon* Automatic Transmission Fluid. “8: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF il cause deterioration in drveabilty and automatic transmission durablity, and may damage he automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. “6: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer “7: For furiher detals, see "Air conditioner specifiation label." “8: For further detals, see "Changing engine oil” “9: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), Dexran" Il/Mercon” or equivalent ATF may also be used. 9-2 Technical and consumer information [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec- ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that spe: could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. H you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. e If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should con- tain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) e If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- hicles. If any driveability problems such as engine stall- ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec- tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. Octane rating tips In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at Technical and consumer information 9-3 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. How- ever, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastem Nevada, southem Idaho, western South Dakota, westem Nebraska, and the part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are en- countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. 9-4 Technical and consumer information However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light Spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

API certification mark API service symbol WTI0082|

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor- rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recom- mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con- serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petro- leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving Il categories. If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI- FICATION MARK, use API grade SL Energy Conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SL, or in combination with other categories (for example, SL/CF) may also be used if one with the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-IIl oil can also be used. NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These oils must, however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- sary when the proper oil type is used and main- tenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper- ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec- ommended SAE viscosity number" shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause seri- ous engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter, When re- placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil fikter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals”. Technical and consumer information 9-5 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and fiter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. Your engine was filed with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more fréquent oil and filter changes: + repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures e_ driving in dusty conditions e_ extensive idiing e_towing a trailer 9-6 Technical and consumer information Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change

RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger- ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equivalents. ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or lu cant will cause severe damage to the conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regula- tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys- tem service. À NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger- ant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VOS5DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° Bore x Stroke in (mm) _ 8.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) Displacement cuin (em°) 218.45 (3,498) Firing order 1-2-8-4-5-6 Idie speed See the “Emission Control label” on the underside of the AIT (in “N' position) hood Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Standard PLFR5A-11 Spark plug Hot _PLFR4A-11 Cold _PLFR6A-11 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) _0.048 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Technical and consumer information 9-7 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheels Overall length in (mm) 193.5(4,915) 17x7)) Overall width in (mm) 71.7(1,821) 18x7.5JJ Overall height in (mm) 58.3(1,481) Tires Front tread P225/55R17 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4(1,559) P245/45R18 18 inch tire in (mm) _61.0(1,549) Spare tire Rear tread Temporary T145/80*17 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6(1,565) Full size 17" or 18" 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2(1,554) Speed rating 17 H Wheelbase in (mm) _111.2(2,824) 18" v Gross vehicle weight Ib (kg) See the “FMVS.S. :“R" or “D” depending on tire manufacturer rating certification label” on the Gross axle weight rating center pillar between the Front Ib (kg) drivers side front and Rear Ib (kg) roar doors. 9-8 Technical and consumer information 110/20/03—arosenma =1 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna)

COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi- cle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. Al gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There- fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there- fore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district cations, transpor- tation, and registration are the responsibi ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LTI0069)| LTI0070|

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number) The vehicle identification number is located as shown. Technical and consumer information 9-9 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

The number is stamped on the engine as shown. 9-10 Technical and consumer information F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M- N.S.S) certification label is affixed as shown This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Num- ber (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at- tached as shown. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

LTI0073)| LTI0074| TIRE PLACARD The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire plac- ard. The tire placard is located under the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown Flat-blade screwdriver Eumper Grommet L=

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag: e_ License plate bracket e_ License plate bracket screws x 2 e_ License plate screws x 2 e_ Screw grommets x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at

the location marks (small dimples) using a

0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the

area behind the fascia, apply only light pres- sure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into

the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90°.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to

mount the license plate to the license plate bracket. 9-12 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

A WARNING is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area le a vehicle. In a col + Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. + Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the fol- lowing terms before loading your vehicle: e_ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and op- tional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. °_ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. © GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle. e_ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi- mum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axe.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD

CAPACITY The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. For ex- ample, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment does not increase load car- ring capacity of your vehicle. To determine vehicle load capacity: Vehicle weight can be determined by using a commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to the

GVWR specified for your vehicle to deter- mine how much more weight your vehicle can carry. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re-

weigh your vehicle to determine if either GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex- ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove cargo as necessary. f either the front or rear GAWRis exceeded, shift the load or remove cargo as necessary. LOADING TIPS e The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certi- fication label. e Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. A WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRSs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the ve- hicle’s warranty.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing à trailer places additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, brak- ing and other systems. A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available from a NISSAN dealer. This guide in- cludes information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load/Specification Chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than specified or using improper towing equipment could adversely af- fect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro- priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). Technical and consumer information 9-13 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

À CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties. A NISSAN Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing infor- mation on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required may be ob- tained from a NISSAN dealer. Tongue load Total trailer load Tongue load Total trailer load x 100 = 9 to 11% CA0009| _À Gross venicie weight A KA Gross axe weight T11012M Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 9 - 11 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart. If the tongue load be- comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. 9-14 Technical and consumer information Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the com- bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen- gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V.S.S. certification label. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

UNIT: Ib (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1,000 (454) MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 100 (45) TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. À genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. A CAUTION + Do not use axle-mounted hitches. + The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact- absorbing bumper. e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys- tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. e To reduce the pos: of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. + After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment. e Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted. Tire pressures + Whentowing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indi- cated on the tire placard. © Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accor- dance with the trailer and tire manufacturer's specifications. Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit tuning corners. Trailer lights Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit. Trailer brakes I your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed. A WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di- rectly to the vehicle brake system. Pre-towing tips e Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, wo suspension or other possible causes of either condition. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Technical and consumer information 9-15 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

e Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle. Trailer towing tips In order to gain skil and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor- mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. + Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. + Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. _Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. © _ Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on à slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission shift selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi- tion before blocking the wheels and applying 9-16 Technical and consumer information the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When going up a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over- loading and/or overheating. However, for long steep grades, do not stay in 1st or 2nd gear when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h). H the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km) Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal tuming radius during the turn. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- hicle handling. lf swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve- hicle speed. This combination will help sta- bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal pass- ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use 5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission). Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. When towing a trailer, transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre- [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

quently. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual. FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. À CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. e Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward. DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product Manual Transmission © Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. © After towing 500 miles, start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may cause dam- age to internal transmission parts.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govem- ment course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driv- ing conditions, and may vary significantly due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, À, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, À, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. À tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Technical and consumer information 9-17 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

A WARNING The traction grade assigned to your ve- hicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests and does not in- clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan- ing or peak traction character Temperature À, B and C Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tire's resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- perature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades À and B rep- resent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law. 9-18 Technical and consumer information A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to: e_ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department PO. Box 191 Gardena, CA 90248-0191 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to: e_ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, LAW 45 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

only) I you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause à crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na- tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. I NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto Safety Hotline tol-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- portation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Con- sumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800- NISSAN-1. In Hawaï call 1-808-836-0888.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re- quired to be in what is called the “ready condi- tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (1/M) test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. I a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready" condition. Before taking the UM test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you A WARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con- ions and obey all traffic laws.

. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. AI- low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal oper- ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds.

8. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 5

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least three

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 min- utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-

lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept- able between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed. Technical and consumer information 9-19 [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best Genuine Nissan Service Manuals source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filed with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro- factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN IN S I D E Ouners Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner's Manuals for older NISSAN models. STORY Er cs For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact: Tweddie Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Service, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 9-20 Technical and consumer information [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals for the 2004 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact DDS Distribution Service, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser- vice Manual or Owner's Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800- 887-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa- tive will assist you. Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Ovwner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons. Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts! If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN'S original exacting specifica- tions — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN's warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro- tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un- necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non- genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion! Why should you take a chance? In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz- ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro- tect you, so you can take action to protect your- self. Is your right! I you should need further information visit us at: Www.nissanusa.com. Technical and consumer information 9-21 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

MEMO 9-22 Technical and consumer information

10 Index Active head restraint .. Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) ............ Air bag warning light... . ... 4-21,2-11 Air cleaner housing filter . . . ........ 4 8-18 Air conditioner Air conditioner service . . ........ -18 Air conditioner specification label Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubrication recommendations . . .…. Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . ... -18 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . Anchor point locations . . . . .. Antenna .............. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . Aniklock brake waming fight Armrests ...... Audible reminders. .… Audio system . . .. AM-FM radio with cassette player. Cassette player. . ...... Compact Disc (CD) changer Compact disc (CD) player . . FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) changer. . . . . 4 4-23 FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player. . . . .. 4 4-23 Radio .................... 4-19 Steering wheel audio control switch Autolight switch Automatic Automatic drive positioner . . . . . Automatic power window switch Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) Driving with automatic transmission. . . 5-7 Transmission selector lever lock release. .................. | 5-10 Battery. ........... - Charge warning light . Battery replacement (See remote keyless entry system). . ............. 4 Before starting the engine Belts (See drive belts) . . Brake Anti-lock brake system @es) . Brake booster : Brake fluid . Brake light (See stop pig . Brake pedal . Brake system Brake warning light : Brake wear indicators . Parking brake check . . Parking brake operation Self-adjusting brakes. . Le Break-in schedule. . . ............ Brightness control Instrument panel . ............. Bulb check/instrument panel .… Bulb replacement. . ........ Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . ......... Car phone or CB radio. . Cargo (See vehicle loading information) Cassette player (See audio system) CD care and cleaning ....... CD changer (See audio system). . CD player (See audio system). . . Check engine indicator light (See malfunction indicator lamp) . . . . . . . Child restraint with top tether strap Child restraints. . . . .. 1-25, 1-2 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . Child safety rear door lock. . . . Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . Cleaning exterior and interior . Clock (models with navigation system). . . . . (models without navigation system). . . . Clutch Clutch fluid . .... Cold weather driving . Compact disc (CD) player [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =

Compass display. ................ 2-6 Console box. .................. 2-81 Control panel buttons With navigation system .......... 4-7 Without navigation system. . . ...... 4-2 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . 4-31 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . ............... 9-2 Changing engine coolant . . ....... 8-8 Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . À 8-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-5 Cornering light . . Corrosion protection Cruise control. . Cup holders. .................. Daytime running light system (Canada only). ................. 2-21 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch Dimensions and weights. . Door locks . Door open warning light Drive belts. . ........... Drive positioner, Automatic. . 3-19 Driving Cold weather driving . . .......... 5-22 Driving with automatic transmission. . . . . 5-7 Driving with manual transmission... . . 5-11 Precautions when starting and driving . .5-2 10-2 Economy - fuel . Emission control infor Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . 9-18 Engine Before starting the engine . . . . Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. . ............... Changing engine coolant . . . Changing engine oil... . . . . Changing engine oil filter Checking engine coolant level. . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . .. ......8-8 Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Engine cooling system ...8-7 Engine oil. ............ ...8-8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5 Engine oil viscosity. . . . .... Engine serial number Engine specifications. Starting the engine. . ...... Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light. Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . Eyeglass case

• Jump starting p. 6
• -6 Key p. 4
• 3-2 Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry system) p. 3
• -5 Labels Air conditioner specification label -11 Emission control information label p. 9
• À 9-10 Engine serial number p. 9
• -10 FMVSS. certification label . 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .… 9-9 Warning labels (for SRS) p. 1
• -21 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System -38 License plate Installing the license plate | 9-11 Light Air bag warning light Brake light (See stop light) Bulb check/instrument panel Bulb replacement p. 1
• Charge warning light p. 2
• -10 Cornering light Fog light switch Headlight and tum signal switch. Interior light . Light bulbs. Low washer fluid warning light. Personal lights Trunk light . Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders -9 Lock Child safety rear door lock. Door locks Glove box lock Power door locks Trunk lid lock opener lever Low fuel waming light Low washer fluid warning light Luggage (See vehicle loading information) : : Maintenance General maintenance . Inside the vehicle Maintenance precautions . Outside the vehicle Seat belt maintenance ee Under the hood and vehicle p. 2
• Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Manual front seat adjustment . Meters and gauges. Instrument brightness control . Mirror Outside mirror control 3-17 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma = p. 4

Outside mirrors . -17 Vanity mirror . ....8-16 Multi-remote control system (See remots keyless entry system). . . ............ 3-5 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system

(NVIS). ...............4 2-16, 3-2, 5-5

• Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) p. 9
• -3 Odometer p. 2
• -4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants Changing engine oil . Changing engine oil filter. Checking engine oil level Engine oil Engine oil and oil filter recommendation p. 9
• -5 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light -10 Engine oil viscosity Outside mirror control Outside mirrors Overheat H your vehicle overheats . Owners manual order form p. 2
• Owners manual/service manual order information -20 10-4 Parking Parking brake check Parking brake operation Parking/parking on hills. Personal lights Power Power door locks Power outlet Power rear windows Power steering fluid. Power steering system . Power windows Rear power windows Precautions Maintenance precautions Precautions on child restraints p. 9
• Precautions on seat belt usage p. 1
• -23 Precautions on supplemental restraint System p. 1
• -9 Precautions when starting and driving -2 Push starting A 6-8 Radio AM-FM radio with cassette player Car phone or CB radio Compact Disc (CD) changer Steering wheel audio control switch. Readiness for inspection maintenance (UM) test Rear power windows p. 5
• switch Refrigerant recommendation Registering your vehicle in another country. Remote keyless entry system Reporting safety defects (US only) Safety Child safety rear door lock. Child seat belts Reporting safety defects (US only) Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment Seat belt Child safety Infants and small children . Injured Person Larger children p. 4
• Precautions on seat belt usage -23 Pregnant women Seat belt extenders Seat belt maintenance Seat belts p. 1
• Shoulder belt height adjustment p. 1
• -29 Three-point type with retractor -27 Seat belt warning light Seatback pockets Seats Adjustment Automatic drive positioner . [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma = p. 1

• Front seats . Heated seats Manual front seat adjustment . Rear seat Security system (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system), engine start p. 2
• -16, 3-2, 5-5 Self-adjusting brakes p. 8
• -23 Service manual order form p. 9
• -20 Servicing air conditioner p. 4
• -18 Shift lock release p. 5
• -10 Shifting Automatic transmission . Manual transmission Shoulder belt height adjustment . 1-29 Spark plug replacement p. 8
• -17 Speedometer SRS waming label p. 1
• -21 Starting Before starting the engine p. 5
• -6 Jump starting p. 6
• -6 Precautions when starting and driving p. 5
• -2 Push starting p. 6
• -8 Starting the engine -6 Steering Heated steering wheel Power steering fluid Power steering system p. 5
• Steering wheel audio control switch. 4-31 Stop light p. 8
• -28 Storage p. 2
• -28 Sun visors p. 3
• -16 Sunglasses case 2-29 Sunglasses holder p. 2
• -29 Sunroof . 2-36 Supplemental air bag warning light. 1-24, 2-11 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels p. 1
• -21 Precautions on supplemental restraint System p. 1
• -9 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) -9 Switch Autolight switch Automatic power window switch Fog light switch Hazard waming flasher switch Headlight and turn signal switch. … . Ignition switch Power door lock switch p. 1
• switch p. 2
• -18 Traction control system (TCS) off switch p. 2
• -26 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch -26 p. 2

• Tachometer p. 2
• -5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge p. 2
• -5 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light -10 Theft (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system), engine start 2-16,3-2,5-5 Three-way catalyst . Tire Flat tire Tire chains Tire placard . Tire pressure Tire rotation . Types of tires . Uniform tire quality grading. Wheels and tires Wheel/tire size Top tether strap child restraint . Tow truck towing p. 2
• Towing load/specification chart . : : ! ! ! 9-15 Trailer towing -18 Traction control system (TCS) off switch p. 9
• Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver p. 2
• -42 Transmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) p. 8
• -11 Driving with automatic transmission p. 5
• -7 Driving with manual transmission p. 5
• -11 Selector lever lock release -10 Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country) Trip odometer p. 5
• Trunk access through the rear seat -6 Trunk lid lock opener lever . Trunk light p. 1
• Tum signal switch (See headlight and tum signal switch) -19, 2-22 Uniform tire quality grading [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma = p. 2

• Vanity mirror
• Vehicle dimensions and weights . Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system Vehicle identification Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) p. 9
• -9 Vehicle identification number CIN) plat - -9 Vehicle loading information. Vehicle recovery . Vehicle security system p. 9
• Vehicle security system (Nissan vehicle immobi- lizer system), engine start p. 2
• -16, 3-2, 5-5 Visors -16 p. 8

• Warning Air bag warning light p. 1
• -21,2-11 Anti-lock brake warning light -9 Battery charge warning light p. 2
• …. 2-10 Brake warning light . 2-10 Door open warning light 2-10 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light. 2-10 Hazard warning flasher switch p. 2
• -23 Low fuel warning light -11 Low washer fluid warning light … 22-11 Seat belt warning light . 22-11 Vehicle security system. 2-14 Warning labels (for SRS) 1-21 10-6 Waring/indicator lights and audible reminders dereuees Warning lights Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch . Weights (See dimensions and weights) . Wheels and tires p. 22
• Wheel/tire size . When traveling or regie y your vehicle in another country. Loue. Window washer fluid . 8-14 Windows Locking passengers’ windows. 2-35 Power rear windows ee 2-35 Power windows . 2-34 Rear power windows p. 2
• -85 Windshield wiper and washer switoh : : : - ! 2-17 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch -17 Wiper blades l 8-21 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma = p. 2

RECOMMENDED FUEL: For 2.5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For 8.5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For improved performance, NISSAN recom- mends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). À CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical and consumer information” section. RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL: e_ API Certification Mark e_ API grade SL, Energy Consenving e_ILSAC grade GF-IIl e_ 5W-30 Viscosity preferred See “Engine oil and oi filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual. TIRE COLD PRESSURE: See tire placard

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE" information found in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future re- liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. [+ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =1

QUICK REFERENCE Engine coolant 8-7 Window washer fluid 8-14 Engine oil 8-8 LES Passenger supplemental front impact air bag 1-9 Audio system 4-19; Air conditioner 4-16 Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-9 Front seats 1-2 Spare tire 6-2 pprsn Fuel filler lid release 3-13; Fuel recommen- dation 9-3

Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-9

13. Trunk release 8-10

WGS0016 [= REVIEW COPY:— 2004 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma =